Citroën C3 03/06/2024 - ∞ Owner Manual

C3
Handbook
ACCESS TO THE HANDBOOK
MOBILE APPLICATIONS
ONLINE
Install the MyCitroën App application (content available online).
Also available in the Scan MyCitroën application (content
available offline).
View or download the handbook at the following address:
http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/
Scan this QR Code for direct access.
Select:
– the language,
– the vehicle and body style,
– the issue period of the handbook corresponding to the date
of 1st registration of the vehicle.
This symbol indicates the latest information available.
WELCOME
Thank you for choosing Citroën C3/ë-C3.
This document contains the key information and recommendations
you will need to be able to explore your vehicle in complete safety.
We strongly recommend familiarising yourself with it, as well as the
Maintenance and Warranty Guide.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in
this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification
for the country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only.
Automobiles CITROËN reserves the right to modify the technical
specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this
document.
If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is
passed on to the new owner.
For any work on your vehicle, contact a qualified workshop that
has the required technical information, skills and equipment, all
of which a CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
Key
Safety warning
Additional information
Environmental protection feature
Left-hand drive vehicle
Right-hand drive vehicle
Location of equipment/button indicated using
a black area
Contents
Overview
Eco-driving
1
Dashboard instruments
Instrument panels 10
11
Warning and indicator lamps 17
Indicators 19
Distance recorders 19
Total distance recorder 20
Configuration menu 22
Trip computer 23
Lighting dimmer 23
Privacy Settings 24
Smartphone Station 25
10-inch touch screen Remotely operable additional functions
26
(Electric) Remote control / Key Back-up procedures Doors Boot Central locking Alarm Electric windows Access
2
28
29
31
31
32
33
34
3
Ease of use and comfort
Correct driving position 37
37
Front seats 38
Rear bench seat 2
40
40
40
41
43
44
45
45
45
46
46
47
49
Steering wheel adjustment Heated steering wheel Mirrors Heating and Ventilation Heating/Manual air conditioning Automatic air conditioning Front demisting/defrosting Rear screen demisting/defrosting Heated windscreen Temperature pre-conditioning (Electric) Courtesy lamps Interior fittings Boot fittings 4
Lighting and visibility
Exterior lighting control stalk 51
52
Direction indicators 52
Automatic illumination of headlamps 53
Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 54
Headlamp beam height adjustment Automatic lighting systems - General
54
recommendations 54
Automatic headlamp dipping 55
Wiper control stalk 56
Automatic wipers 57
Changing a wiper blade General safety recommendations Hazard warning lamps Horn Pedestrian horn (Hybrid or Electric) Emergency or assistance Event Data Recording system Safety
5
59
59
60
60
60
62
Electronic stability control (ESC) Seat belts Airbags Child seats Deactivating the front passenger airbag ISOFIX child seats i-Size child seats Installing child seats Child lock 63
64
66
69
70
71
72
73
76
6
Driving
Driving recommendations 77
79
Starting/Switching off the engine 81
Manual parking brake 81
Electric parking brake 83
6-speed manual gearbox 83
Automatic gearbox (EAT6) Electric dual-clutch automatic gearbox
86
(e-DCS6) 89
Drive selector (Electric) 90
Progressive Hydraulic Cushions 90
ECO driving mode 90
Gear shift indicator 91
Hill start assist 91
Stop & Start (Petrol) 93
e-Auto mode (Hybrid) 94
Tyre under-inflation detection Driving and manoeuvring aids - General
95
recommendations 96
Road signs recognition 99
Overspeed alert 99
Speed limiter 100
Cruise control - Specific recommendations 101
Cruise control Contents
Active Safety Brake with Collision Risk Alert
and Intelligent emergency braking assistance 102
106
Distraction detection 107
Lane departure warning 108
Lane keeping assist 111
Parking sensors 112
Reversing camera 7
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels 115
115
Refuelling Electrified vehicles - General
116
recommendations 117
Hybrid system 118
Charging system (Electric) 125
Charging the traction battery (Electric) 128
Snow chains 129
Towing device 129
Roof bars 130
Energy economy mode 131
Bonnet 132
Engine compartment 132
Checking levels 134
Checks 136
Free-wheeling 137
Advice on care and maintenance In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle Tool kit Temporary puncture repair kit Spare wheel Changing a bulb Fuses 8
139
139
140
143
146
149
149
155
12 V battery / Accessory battery Towing the vehicle 9
Technical data
Engine technical data and towed loads 159
160
Petrol engines 161
Hybrid engines 162
Electric engines 163
Dimensions 163
Identification markings Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen 10" Central Touchscreen
First steps Steering-mounted controls Voice commands Applications Radio Media Phone Connectivity Mirror Screen Navigation Settings 10
Vehicle data recording and privacy
165
166
166
167
167
169
170
171
172
174
175
11
Alphabetical index
Appendix
3
Overview
Instruments and controls
These illustrations and descriptions are
intended as a guide. The presence and location
of certain elements may vary, depending on the
version or trim level.
2. Interior rear view mirror
3. Instrument panel
4. Fusebox
5. Electric windows
Electric door mirrors
6. Bonnet release
7. Front passenger airbag
8. Glove box
Steering-mounted controls
A. Increase the speed setting
Activate the Speed limiter or Cruise control
B. Decrease the speed setting
Activate the Speed limiter or Cruise control
C. Up: navigation through the menus of the
instrument panel/settings
D. Validate the selection in the menus of the
instrument panel/settings
E. Down: navigation through the menus of the
instrument panel/settings
F. Pause/Reactivate the Speed limiter or Cruise
control with the speed setting saved
G. Select/Deselect the Speed limiter
Select/Deselect the Cruise control
4. Horn
5. Audio system setting controls and phone
H. Select an audio source
I. Voice commands
J. Increase the volume
K. Mute the volume
L. Decrease the volume
M. Short press: change to next stored radio
station/change to next song/accept an
incoming call
1. Courtesy lamp/Front reading lamps
Emergency and assistance call buttons
Warning lamps display for seat belts and
front passenger airbag
4
1. External lighting controls/Direction
indicators
2. Wiper controls/Screenwash/Trip computer
3. Speed limiter/Cruise control/Menus and
settings
N. Short press: change to previous stored radio
station/change to previous song/reject a call
Overview
Central controls (with automatic air
conditioning)
10. Heated seats
Hybrid system
Side controls
1. Petrol engine
1.
Hazard warning lamps
2.
Bluetooth® connection and access to the
smartphone (with Smartphone Station)
or
Central locking (with touch screen)
3.
Automatic air conditioning
4.
Front demisting/defrosting
5.
Maximum air conditioning
6.
Rear screen demisting/defrosting
7.
Air conditioning
8.
Heated steering wheel
9.
Heated windscreen
1. Headlamps beam height adjustment
2. Electric motor
2. Deactivation of the speed limit information
audible warning
or
Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip
regulation (ASR)
3. 7-speed electric dual-clutch automatic
gearbox (e-DCS7)
3. Lane keeping assist
4. Stop & Start (Petrol)/e-Auto mode (Hybrid)
5. Central locking (with Smartphone Station)
6. Alarm (depending on equipment)
4. 48 V traction battery
5. 12 V accessory battery
6. DC/DC converter
7. Belt starter
The 48 V hybrid technology requires no
connection to charge the traction battery.
The Hybrid system does not operate
continuously, but is activated according to
the state of the vehicle, the state of charge
of the traction battery, the thermal comfort
of the passenger compartment (switching on
the heating or air conditioning), the driving
conditions (acceleration, deceleration, braking,
5
Overview
engine start-up) and the road conditions (uphill,
downhill):
– The vehicle always starts with the petrol
engine to ensure the efficiency of the catalytic
converter and the availability of the brake assist.
– In normal driving, the petrol engine and
electric motor work together or separately
to optimise fuel consumption and electrical
energy or to charge the traction battery.
– During the acceleration phases, the electric
motor provides an additional boost to reach
the torque needed as fast as possible and to
improve the acceleration at low speed.
– During the deceleration phases, the electric
motor charges the traction battery, using the
inertia of the vehicle.
– The driving in all-electric is possible for
parking manoeuvring, for 20 mph (30 km/h)
speed zones in city, on urban and country roads
with smooth driving and on motorways in slight
deceleration or downhill.
The electric motor is integrated into the
automatic gearbox.
The DC/DC converter provides the link between
the 12 V accessory power supply and the 48 V
traction power supply.
The belt starter restarts the petrol engine after
driving in all-electric.
6
Electric drive system
1. Charging connectors
2. Traction battery
3. Accessory battery
4. Heat pump
5. On-board charger
6. Electric motor
7. Charging cable
The charging connectors 1 enable 3 types of
charging:
– Domestic charging in mode 2 using a
domestic socket and associated charging cable
7.
– Accelerated charging in mode 3 using an
accelerated charging unit (Wallbox).
– Superfast charging in mode 4 using a fast
public charger.
The 400 V traction battery 2 uses Lithium-Ion
technology. It stores and supplies the energy
required for the operation of the electric motor,
air conditioning and heating. Its charge level is
represented by an indicator and a reserve power
warning lamp on the instrument panel.
The 12 V accessory battery 3 powers the
vehicle’s conventional electrical system. It is
recharged automatically by the traction battery
via the on-board charger.
The heat pump 4 provides passenger
compartment heating and regulates traction
battery and on-board charger cooling.
The on-board charger 5 manages the domestic
charging (mode 2) and accelerated charging
(mode 3) of the traction battery as well as the
recharging of the 12 V accessory battery.
The electric motor 6 provides propulsion in
accordance with the selected driving mode and
driving conditions. It recovers energy during
vehicle braking and deceleration phases.
Labels
“Ease of use and comfort - Rear bench seat Rear head restraints” section:
"Ease of use and comfort - Front fittings Wireless smartphone charger" section:
Overview
"Lighting and visibility - Exterior lighting
control stalk" and "In the event of a
breakdown - Changing a bulb" sections:
"Practical information - Compatibility of
fuels" section:
"Practical information - Charging system
(Electric)" section:
"Safety - General safety recommendations Installing electrical accessories" section:
"In the event of a breakdown - Spare wheel"
section:
"In the event of a breakdown - 12 V battery/
Accessory battery" section:
"Safety - Child seats - Deactivating the front
passenger airbag" section:
24V
12V
"Practical information - Charging the traction
battery (Electric)" section:
"Practical information - Bonnet" section:
"Safety - ISOFIX mountings" section:
i-Size
"Practical information - Checking levels Engine coolant" section:
TOP TETHER
"Driving - Electric parking brake" section:
"In the event of a breakdown - Temporary
puncture repair kit" section:
"Driving - Stop & Start" section:
7
Eco-driving
Eco-driving
Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday
practices that allow the motorist to optimise
the vehicle's energy consumption (fuel and/or
electricity) and CO2 emissions.
Optimise your use of the gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and
change up promptly. While accelerating,
change up early.
With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic
mode. Do not depress the accelerator pedal
heavily or suddenly.
The gear shift indicator prompts you to
engage the most suitable gear. Whenever this
indication is displayed on the instrument panel,
follow it straight away.
With an automatic gearbox, this indicator
appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use
engine braking rather than the brake pedal and
press the accelerator gradually. These practices
help to save on energy consumption, reduce
CO2 emissions and decrease general traffic
noise.
With a hybrid engine, engine braking is more
efficient. Anticipate slowing down as much as
you can and, if possible, favour deceleration
with engine braking in order to charge the
traction battery, to increase all-electric driving
and to reduce fuel consumption.
8
When the traffic is flowing smoothly, select the
cruise control.
Disconnect all portable devices before leaving
the vehicle.
Control the use of electrical equipment
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Before moving off, if the passenger
compartment is too warm, ventilate it by
opening the windows and air vents before using
the air conditioning.
At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the
windows and leave the air vents open.
Consider using equipment that can help keep
the temperature in the passenger compartment
down (e.g. sunroof blind, window blinds).
Unless automatically regulated, switch off
the air conditioning as soon as the desired
temperature has been reached.
Switch off the demisting and defrosting
functions, if they are not managed
automatically.
Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Adapt your use of the headlamps and/or
foglamps to the level of visibility, in accordance
with current legislation in the country in which
you are driving.
Avoid running the engine before moving off,
particularly in winter (other than in severe
wintry conditions: temperature below -23°C).
The vehicle will warm up much faster while
driving.
As a passenger, avoid connecting your
multimedia devices (e.g. film, music, video
game) to help reduce the consumption of
energy.
Spread loads throughout the vehicle. Place the
heaviest items in the boot as close as possible
to the rear seats.
Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and
minimise wind resistance (e.g. roof bars, roof
rack, bicycle carrier, trailer). Preferably, use a
roof box.
Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and
refit summer tyres.
Comply with the servicing instructions
Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres
cold, referring to the label in the door aperture
on the driver's side.
Carry out this check in particular:
– before a long journey.
– at each change of season.
– after a long period out of use.
Do not forget the spare wheel and, where
applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (e.g. engine
oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment
filter, etc.). Observe the schedule of operations
in the manufacturer's service schedule.
When filling the fuel tank, do not continue
after the third cut-out of the nozzle, to avoid
overflow.
Eco-driving
You will only see the fuel consumption of your
new vehicle settle down to a consistent average
after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres).
Optimising the driving range of electrified
vehicles
The vehicle's consumption of electrical energy
greatly depends on the route profile, speed and
driving style, as well as the use of the heating/
air conditioning.
Favour the ECO and CHARGE zones of the
power indicator by driving smoothly and at a
steady speed.
Hybrid vehicles
Maximise the vehicle's inertia by releasing the
accelerator pedal so that the vehicle slows
down by itself (e.g. when driving downhill or
approaching a traffic light).
When the accelerator pedal is released,
provided that the slider on the power indicator
in the instrument panel is still moving in the
CHARGE zone, energy recovery is optimal.
Energy recovery makes it possible to make
efficient use of the "passive" phases of driving
(deceleration).
The recovered energy is used to recharge the
traction battery and is then used for all-electric
driving or further acceleration.
When the traction battery is almost full, the
energy recovery is gradually reduced.
Electric vehicles
Program a destination into the vehicle's GPS
navigation system to optimise consumption
during a journey.
Anticipate the need to slow down, and brake
smoothly, whenever possible using engine
braking with the regenerative braking function,
which will move the power indicator into the
"CHARGE" zone.
Use the air conditioning rather than the heating
to demist the passenger compartment.
9
Dashboard instruments
LCD instrument panel
8. Total distance recorder (miles or km)
Remaining range (miles or km)
Current consumption (Petrol)
Percentage of the current journey travelled
in all-electric driving mode (Electric)
5. Gear shift indicator (arrow and
recommended gear)
Selector position and gear on automatic
gearbox (Petrol or Hybrid)
Drive selector position (Electric)
6. Matrix display
Petrol
Matrix instrument panel
Display screen
Electric
1. Outside temperature (°C or °F)
Petrol
2. Fuel gauge (Petrol)
Charge level indicator (Electric)
3. Cruise control/Speed limiter settings
Petrol or Hybrid
4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h)
5. Display of speed limit signs
6. Gear shift indicator (arrow and
recommended gear) (Petrol)
Selector position and gear on automatic
gearbox (Petrol)
Drive selector position (Electric)
7. Coolant temperature indicator (°C) (Petrol)
Power indicator (Electric)
Hybrid
Electric
1. Cruise control/Speed limiter settings
2. Fuel gauge (Petrol or Hybrid)
Charge level indicator (Electric)
3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h)
4. Display of speed limit signs
10
Hybrid
Dashboard instruments
status of a system (operation or deactivation
indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two
ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours.
Associated warnings
Hybrid or Electric
1. Display of speed limit signs
2. Gear shift indicator (arrow and
recommended gear)
Selector position and gear on automatic
gearbox (Petrol or Hybrid)
Drive selector position (Electric)
3. Display area:
– Outside temperature (°C or °F).
– Total distance recorder (miles or km).
– Trip A or B with time and distance
travelled (miles or km).
– Remaining range (miles or km).
– Current consumption (mpg or l/100km).
– Power indicator (Hybrid or Electric).
– Energy flow (Hybrid).
– Warning and status messages.
Warning and indicator
lamps
Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator
lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a
malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating
The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied
by an audible signal and/or a message displayed
in a screen.
Relating the type of alert to the operating
status of the vehicle allows you to determine
whether the situation is normal or whether a
fault has occurred: refer to the description of
each lamp for further information.
When the ignition is switched on
Certain red or orange warning lamps come on
for a few seconds when the ignition is switched
on. These warning lamps should go off as soon
as the engine is started.
For more information on a system or a function,
refer to the corresponding section.
Persistent warning lamp
If a red or orange warning lamp comes on, there
may be fault which needs further investigation.
If a lamp remains lit
The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning
and indicator lamp description indicate whether
you should contact a qualified professional
in addition to the immediate recommended
actions.
(1): You must stop the vehicle.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition.
(2): Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
(3): Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
1
List of warning and indicator
lamps
Red warning/indicator lamps
STOP
Fixed, associated with another warning
lamp, accompanied by the display of a
message and an audible signal.
A serious fault with the engine, braking system,
power steering or automatic gearbox or a major
electrical fault has been detected.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Traction battery overheating (Hybrid or
Electric)
Fixed, combined with the STOP
warning lamp, accompanied by
the display of a message and an audible signal.
The traction battery's temperature is too high.
Carry out (1).
Evacuate the vehicle as quickly as possible
and move to a safe distance.
Carry out (2).
11
Dashboard instruments
Traction battery malfunction (Hybrid or
Electric)
Fixed, combined with the Service
warning lamp, accompanied by
the display of a message.
The traction battery has a fault.
Carry out (2).
Fixed when the ignition is switched on,
accompanied by a message.
It is not possible to start the vehicle while the
charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s
connector.
Disconnect the charging cable and close the
flap.
Engine oil pressure (Petrol or Hybrid)
12 V battery charge
Fixed.
There is a fault with the engine
lubrication system.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Maximum coolant temperature
Fixed.
The temperature of the cooling system
is too high.
Carry out (1), then wait until the engine has
cooled down before topping up the level, if
necessary. If the problem persists, carry out (2).
System malfunction (Hybrid or Electric)
Fixed.
A fault has been detected in the system
(electric motor or traction battery).
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Cable connected (Electric)
Fixed when the ignition is switched on.
The charging cable is connected to the
vehicle's connector.
12
Fixed.
The battery charging circuit is faulty
(e.g. dirty terminals, loose or severed alternator
belt).
Carry out (1).
If the electric parking brake stops working,
immobilise the vehicle:
► With the manual gearbox, engage a gear.
► With the automatic gearbox or drive
selector, fit the chock against one of the
wheels.
Clean and tighten the terminals. If the warning
lamp does not go off when the engine is
started, carry out (2).
Braking
Fixed.
The brake fluid level in the braking
circuit has dropped significantly.
Carry out (1), then top up with fluid
that complies with the manufacturer's
recommendations. If the problem persists, carry
out (2).
Fixed.
The electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD) system is faulty.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Electric parking brake (Hybrid or Electric)
Power steering
Fixed.
The electric parking brake is applied.
Flashing.
Application/release is faulty.
Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level
surface).
With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
With an automatic gearbox or drive selector,
select mode P.
Switch off the ignition and carry out (2).
Manual parking brake
Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an
increasing audible signal.
A seat belt has not been fastened or has been
unfastened.
Fixed.
The power steering has a fault.
Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry
out (3).
Fixed.
The parking brake is applied or not
properly released.
Seat belts not fastened/unfastened
Dashboard instruments
Orange warning/indicator lamps
Service
Temporarily on, accompanied by the
display of a message.
One or more minor faults, for which there is/
are no specific warning lamp(s), have been
detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the
message displayed on the instrument panel.
You may be able to deal with some faults
yourself, such as changing the battery in the
remote control.
For other faults, such as with the tyre underinflation detection system, carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
message.
One or more major faults, for which there is/
are no specific warning lamp(s), have been
detected.
Identify the cause of the fault using the
message displayed on the instrument panel,
then carry out (3).
Malfunction (with electric parking brake)
Fixed, accompanied by the
message "Parking brake fault".
The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the
engine running.
If manual application and release commands
are not working, the electric parking brake
control is faulty.
The automatic functions must be used at all
times and are automatically reactivated in the
event of a fault with the control.
Carry out (2).
Fixed, accompanied by the
message "Parking brake
fault".
The electric parking brake is faulty: manual and
automatic functions may not be working.
When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle:
► Pull the electric parking brake control and
hold it for approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until
the indicator lamp lights up on the instrument
panel.
If this procedure does not work, secure the
vehicle:
► Park on a level surface.
► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear.
► With an automatic gearbox or drive selector,
select mode P, then place the supplied chock
against one of the wheels.
Then carry out (2).
Automatic functions deactivated (electric
parking brake)
Fixed.
The "automatic application" (on
switching off the engine) and "automatic
release" (on acceleration) functions are
deactivated.
If automatic application/release is no longer
possible:
► Start the engine.
► Use the control to apply the electric parking
brake.
► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal.
► Hold the control pressed in the release
direction for between 10 and 15 seconds.
► Release the control.
► Depress and hold the brake pedal.
► Pull the control in the application direction
for 2 seconds.
► Release the control and the brake pedal.
1
Power steering
Fixed.
A minor fault in the power steering has
been detected.
Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry
out (3).
Engine self-diagnostics system (Petrol or
Hybrid)
Fixed.
A major engine fault has been
detected.
Carry out (1) and then (2).
Fixed.
A minor engine fault has been
detected.
Carry out (3).
Engine self-diagnostic system (Petrol or
Hybrid)
fault.
Flashing.
The engine management system has a
13
Dashboard instruments
Fixed.
The state of charge of the traction
battery is critical.
The engine power gradually decreases.
You must put the vehicle on charge.
If the warning lamp remains lit, carry out (2).
Low fuel level (Petrol or Hybrid)
Collision Risk Alert/Active Safety Brake
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal
and a message.
When it first comes on, there remains
approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank
(reserve).
Until the fuel level is topped up, this alert will
be repeated every time the ignition is switched
on, with increasing frequency as the fuel level
decreases and approaches zero.
Refuel without delay to avoid running out of
fuel.
Never drive until completely empty, as this
could damage the emissions control and
injection systems.
Low traction battery level (Electric)
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal.
The state of charge of the traction
battery is low.
View the remaining range.
Put the vehicle on charge as soon as possible.
14
Tortoise mode with limited driving range
(Electric)
There is a risk that the catalytic converter will
be destroyed.
You must carry out (2).
Fixed.
The emissions control system has a fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the
engine is started.
Carry out (3) without delay.
Flashing.
The system activates and brakes the
vehicle momentarily to reduce the speed of
collision with the vehicle in front.
For more information, refer to the Driving
section.
Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
message.
The system has been deactivated via the
instrument panel menu, using the steeringmounted controls.
Fixed, accompanied by a message and an
audible signal.
The system has a fault.
Carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied by the display of the
message "Driving Assistance Sensor
blind: Clean sensor, see User Manual ".
The sensor is masked.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition.
Clean the front camera.
Fixed.
The system has a fault.
If these warning lamps come on after the
engine is switched off and then restarted, carry
out (3).
Fixed.
The system is deactivated
temporarily because the driver and/or front
passenger (depending on version) has been
detected as present but the corresponding seat
belt has not been fastened.
Road signs recognition
Temporarily on.
The speed limit change sound has been
deactivated.
Fixed.
The system has a fault.
Carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied by the display of the
message "Driving Assistance Sensor
blind: Clean sensor, see User Manual ".
The sensor is masked.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition.
Clean the front camera.
Lane keeping assist
Flashing.
You are about to cross a broken lane
marking without operating the direction
indicators.
The system is activated, then corrects the
trajectory if it detects a risk of unintentionally
crossing a line or hard shoulder (depending on
version).
Dashboard instruments
For more information, refer to the Driving
section.
Fixed.
The system has been automatically
deactivated or placed on standby.
Fixed, accompanied by the display of the
message "Driving Assistance Sensor
blind: Clean sensor, see User Manual ".
The sensor is masked.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition.
Clean the front camera.
Fixed.
The system has a fault.
Carry out (3).
Driver Attention Warning (Distraction
detection)
Fixed.
The system is deactivated.
Fixed.
The system has a fault.
Carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied by the display of the
message "Driving Assistance Sensor
blind: Clean sensor, see User Manual ".
The sensor is masked.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition.
Clean the front camera.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
The vehicle retains conventional braking.
Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry
out (3).
Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip
regulation (ASR)
Flashing.
DSC/ASR system regulation is activated
in the event of a loss of grip or trajectory.
Fixed.
The DSC/ASR system has a fault.
Carry out (3).
Hill start assist
Fixed, accompanied by the
message "Anti roll-back system
fault".
The system has a fault.
Carry out (3).
Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip
regulation (ASR)
Fixed.
The system is deactivated.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding button
is on.
The DSC/ASR system is reactivated
automatically when the vehicle is restarted,
and at speeds above approximately 31 mph
(50 km/h).
At speeds below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be
reactivated manually.
Under-inflation
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal
and a message.
The pressure in one or more tyres is too low.
Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as
possible.
Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting
the pressure.
Under-inflation warning lamp
flashing then fixed and Service
warning lamp fixed.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
Under-inflation detection is no longer
monitored.
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible
and carry out (3).
1
Parking sensors
Flashing.
The system detects an obstacle.
Fixed, associated with the Service
warning lamp, accompanied by
the display of a message and an audible signal.
At least one of the system's sensors has a fault.
Carry out (3).
Fixed, only the Service warning lamp.
Another type of system malfunction
occurs.
Carry out (3).
Fixed.
The anti-lock braking system has a fault.
15
Dashboard instruments
Airbags
Fixed, associated with the Service
warning lamp and accompanied
by the display of a message.
One of the airbags or seat belt pyrotechnic
pretensioners is faulty.
Carry out (3).
Front passenger airbag (ON)
Fixed.
The front passenger airbag is activated.
The control is set to the "ON" position.
In this case, do not install a "rearward facing"
child seat on the front passenger seat - risk of
serious injury!
Front passenger airbag (OFF)
Fixed.
The front passenger airbag is
deactivated.
The control is set to the “OFF” position.
A "rearward facing" child seat can be installed,
unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags
warning lamp on).
Stop & Start (Petrol)
Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
message.
The Stop & Start system has been deactivated
manually.
The engine will not switch off at the next traffic
stop.
Reactivate the system via the instrument panel,
using the steering-mounted controls.
16
Fixed.
The Stop & Start system has been
deactivated automatically.
The engine will not switch off at the next traffic
stop, if the exterior temperature is:
– below 0°C.
– above +35°C.
For more information, refer to the Driving
section.
Flashing then fixed, accompanied by a
message.
The system has a fault.
Carry out (3).
e-Auto mode (Hybrid)
Fixed, accompanied by the display of a
message.
The e-Auto mode has been deactivated
manually.
The petrol engine will not switch off at the next
release of the accelerator pedal or at the next
traffic stop.
Reactivate the mode via the instrument panel,
using the steering-mounted controls.
Automatic headlamp dipping
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal
and a message.
A function or camera malfunction is detected.
Carry out (2).
Rear foglamp
Fixed.
The lamp is on.
Green warning/indicator lamps
Stop & Start (Petrol)
Fixed.
When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start
system puts the engine into STOP mode.
Flashing temporarily.
STOP mode is momentarily unavailable
or START mode is automatically triggered.
For more information, refer to the Driving
section.
Vehicle ready to drive (Electric)
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal
when it comes on.
The vehicle is ready to drive and the thermal
comfort systems are available.
The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and
lights up again when the vehicle stops moving.
The lamp will go out when you switch off the
motor and exit the vehicle.
Automatic wiping
Fixed.
Automatic windscreen wiping is
activated.
Direction indicators
Flashing with audible signal.
The direction indicators are on.
Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps
Fixed.
With adequate ambient light, the
daytime running lamps are on.
Dashboard instruments
With inadequate ambient light, the sidelamps
are on.
Front foglamps
Fixed.
The front foglamps are on.
Automatic headlamp dipping
Fixed.
The function has been activated
via the instrument panel menu, using the
steering-mounted controls.
The lighting control stalk ring is in the “AUTO”
position.
For more information, refer to the Lighting and
visibility section.
Dipped beam headlamps
Fixed.
The lamps are on.
Blue warning/indicator lamps
Main beam headlamps
Fixed.
The lamps are on.
Black/white warning lamps
Foot on the clutch (Petrol)
Fixed.
Stop & Start: the change to START mode
is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully
depressed.
Fully depress the clutch pedal.
Foot on the brake (Hybrid or Electric)
Fixed.
Insufficient or no pressure on the brake
pedal.
With the engine running, before releasing the
parking brake, to move out of mode P on an
automatic gearbox or a drive selector.
Pedestrian horn (Hybrid or Electric)
Fixed.
Horn fault detected.
Carry out (3).
Fixed, accompanied by an onscreen
message.
The system has a fault.
Stay alert and drive carefully, then carry out (3).
1
Indicators
Coolant temperature
indicator
Door(s) open
Fixed, associated with a message
identifying the access.
A door or the tailgate is not properly closed
(speed less than 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Fixed, associated with a message
identifying the access, accompanied by
an audible signal.
A door or the tailgate is not properly closed
(speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)).
Lane departure warning
Flashing, accompanied by an audible
signal.
A lane marking has been crossed on the left or
right.
Turn the steering wheel in the opposite
direction to return to the correct trajectory.
For more information, refer to the Driving
section.
With the engine running:
– In zone A, the temperature is correct.
– In zone B, the temperature is too high. The
associated warning lamp and the STOP warning
lamp light up in red on the instrument panel,
accompanied by the display of a message and
an audible signal.
You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Wait a few minutes before switching off the
engine.
After switching off the ignition,
carefully open the bonnet and check
the coolant level.
17
Dashboard instruments
For more information on Checking
levels, refer to the corresponding
section.
Service indicator
The servicing information is expressed in terms
of distance (miles or kilometres) and/or time
(months or days).
The alert is given at whichever of these two
terms is reached first.
The servicing information is displayed in the
instrument panel. Depending on the version of
the vehicle:
– The distance recorder display line indicates
the distance remaining before the next service
is due, or the distance travelled since it was due
preceded by the "-" sign.
– An alert message indicates the distance
remaining, as well as the period before the next
service is due or how long it is overdue.
The value indicated is calculated
according to the distance covered and
the time elapsed since the last service.
The alert may also be triggered close to a
due date.
In accordance with the vehicle's
maintenance plan, the service may consist
of either:
– A yearly visit.
– A complete service.
18
Service spanner
On temporarily when the ignition is
switched on.
Between 1,860 and 620 miles (3,000 and
1,000 km) or 60 and 21 days remain before the
next service is due.
Fixed, when the ignition is switched on.
The next service is due in less than
620 miles (1,000 km) or 21 days.
Have your vehicle serviced very soon.
Service spanner flashing
Flashing then fixed, when the ignition is
switched on.
The servicing interval has been exceeded.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
Resetting the service indicator
The service indicator must be reset after each
service.
If you have serviced your vehicle yourself:
► Switch the ignition off.
► With the Accessories mode on, press the
button on the steering wheel to display the
menus on the instrument panel.
► Once the desired menu has been reached,
press and hold the button to reset.
A countdown begins.
► When the display indicates "0", release the
button; the spanner disappears.
Reminder of the service information
The service information can be accessed at any
time.
► Press this button on the steering wheel.
The service information is displayed for a few
seconds, then disappears.
Dashboard instruments
Engine oil level indicator
(Depending on version)
On versions fitted with an electric gauge,
the engine oil level status is displayed on the
instrument panel for a few seconds when the
ignition is switched on, after the servicing
information.
The level read will only be correct if
the vehicle is on level ground and the
engine has been off for more than 30
minutes.
Oil level correct
This is indicated by the display of "OIL OK" or
by the message "Oil level correct" (depending
on the instrument panel).
Low oil level
This is indicated by the display of "OIL" or by
the message "Oil level incorrect" (depending
on the instrument panel), accompanied by the
lighting of the Service warning lamp and an
audible signal.
If a low oil level is confirmed by a check using
the dipstick, the level must be topped up to
avoid damage to the engine.
For more information on Checking levels, refer
to the corresponding section.
Oil gauge malfunction
This is indicated by the display of "OIL_ _"
or by the message "Oil level measurement
invalid" (depending on the instrument panel),
accompanied by the lighting of the Service
warning lamp and an audible signal.
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In the event of a malfunction of the
electric gauge, the oil level is no longer
monitored.
If the system is faulty, you must check the
engine oil level using the manual dipstick
located in the engine compartment.
For more information on Checking levels,
refer to the corresponding section.
Distance recorders
Total distance recorder
The total distance recorder measures the total
distance travelled by the vehicle since its initial
registration.
With the ignition on, the total distance is
displayed at all times. It remains displayed for
30 seconds after switching off the ignition. It is
displayed when the driver's door is opened, and
when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Trip distance recorder
This measures the distance travelled since it
was last reset by the driver.
1
Resetting the trip recorder
► With the ignition on, press successively the
button on the end of the wiper control stalk.
► Once the correct menu is displayed, make a
long press to reset to zero.
Power indicator (Hybrid or
Electric)
The power indicator shows in real time the
power demanded from the vehicle.
There are 3 zones:
When travelling abroad, you may have
to change the distance units (miles or
km): the displayed speed must be in the local
country’s official unit (mph or km/h).
The unit is changed via the screen's
configuration application, with the vehicle
stationary.
19
Dashboard instruments
For hybrid versions
POWER
ECO
High power demand, using the
combined capabilities of the petrol
engine and the electric motor.
The slider is located in this zone
during more dynamic driving phases
when high levels of performance are
being demanded.
Optimal use of energy (internal
combustion or electric).
The slider is located in this zone
when driving under electric power
and when optimal use is being made
of the petrol engine, both accessible
by adopting a suitable driving style.
CHARGE Energy recovery for recharging the
traction battery.
The slider is located in this zone
during deceleration: taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal or braking.
When the ignition is switched on and
before the engine is started, the power
indicator only displays "OFF".
For electric versions
CHARGE Traction battery charging during
deceleration and braking.
ECO
20
Moderate energy consumption and
optimised driving range.
POWER
Energy consumption by the drive
train during acceleration.
NEUTRAL
When the ignition is switched on, the vehicle’s
electric drive train neither consumes nor
generates energy; after sweeping over the
indicator, the cursor returns to its "neutral"
position: between ECO and CHARGE.
With the ignition off, opening the
driver's door activates the indicator,
which moves to the "neutral" position:
between ECO and CHARGE.
Charge level indicator
(Electric)
The traction battery's actual charge level and
the remaining range are displayed continuously
when the vehicle is started.
With the ignition off, opening the
driver's door activates the indicator.
► View the remaining range on the instrument
panel.
► Put the vehicle on charge as soon as
possible.
2nd level: Critical
The state of charge of the traction
battery is critical.
Fixed, together with the reserve warning lamp,
accompanied by an audible signal.
► You must put the vehicle on charge.
The remaining range is no longer
calculated. The drive train power
gradually decreases.
The heating and air conditioning are
switched off.
Configuration menu
With LCD instrument panel
Associated warning lamps
Two successive alert levels indicate that the
energy available has dropped to a low level:
1st level: Reserve
The state of charge of the traction
battery is low.
Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal.
► With ignition on or engine running, make
a short press on the button 1 on the end of
Dashboard instruments
the wiper control stalk to access the different
menus:
• Odometer
• Trip A / Reset: press and hold
• Trip B / Reset: press and hold
• Range
• Amount of fuel consumption (Petrol) /
Amount of energy consumption (Electric) /
Reset: press and hold
► With the ignition on, press on the
thumbwheel 2 on the steering wheel, then
press up or down through the different menus.
► Once on a menu, press on the thumbwheel
again to access the menu settings:
• Tyre pressure monitoring system / Reset:
press and hold
• Brightness level
• Unit selection
• Over speed alert
• Speed limit change notification
• Driver Attention Alert
• Active Safety Brake
• Privacy
• Dual maintenance
► With the Accessories mode on, press on the
thumbwheel 2 on the steering wheel:
• to display the service reminder
• for 10 seconds to reset the service indicator
1
With matrix instrument
panel
► With ignition on or engine running, make
a short press on the button 1 on the end of
the wiper control stalk to access the different
menus:
• Odometer
• Trip A / Reset: press and hold
• Trip B / Reset: press and hold
• Range / Amount of fuel consumption
(Petrol or Hybrid) / Amount of energy
consumption (Electric)
• Gauge
• Flow page (Hybrid)
► With the ignition on, press on the
thumbwheel 2 on the steering wheel, then
press up or down through the different menus.
► Once on a menu, press on the thumbwheel
again, then press up or down through the
different the sub-menus:
– Driver Assistant
• Auto High Beam
• Active Safety Brake
• SLI Over Speed Alert
• Country Selection
• Speed Change Alert
• Driver Attention Alert
• Tyre pressure monitoring system / Reset:
press and hold
– User Settings
• Language Selection
• Unit Selection
• Gauge Selection
• Brightness Level
• Ambient Level
21
Dashboard instruments
• Privacy
• Dual maintenance
► Once on a sub-menu, press on the
thumbwheel again to access the sub-menu
settings.
► With the Accessories mode on, press on the
thumbwheel 2 on the steering wheel:
• to display the service reminder
• for 10 seconds to reset the service indicator
Trip computer
► Press the button located on the end of the
wiper control stalk.
► Press the button on the end of the wiper
control stalk for more than 2 seconds.
Displays information related to the current
trip (e.g. range, average consumption, average
speed, distance travelled).
End of trip page
Definitions
Information display
Details are displayed successively.
– Trip mileage.
– Range.
– Current fuel consumption.
– Average speed.
– Stop & Start time counter.
– Information from the speed limit recognition
system.
(Depending on version)
When the ignition is switched off, the
instrument panel automatically displays an
additional page of the trip computer that
recapitulates information about the last trip.
The end of trip page contains the following
information:
– Range.
– Trip time.
– Distance travelled.
– Percentage of the current journey travelled in
all-electric driving mode (Hybrid).
– Average consumption.
Trip reset
The reset is performed when the trip counter is
displayed.
22
Range
(miles or km)
(Traction battery charge level percentage)
(Electric)
/
Distance that can still be
travelled with the fuel remaining
in the tank (based on the average fuel
consumption over the last few miles
(kilometres) travelled) (Petrol).
Actual traction battery charge level and
remaining range (Electric).
This value may vary following a change in
driving style or terrain, leading to a significant
change in current fuel consumption.
For petrol versions
When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km),
dashes are displayed.
Dashboard instruments
After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the
range is recalculated and is displayed if it
exceeds 62 miles (100 km).
Dashes appearing permanently in place of
numbers while driving indicates a malfunction.
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
For electric versions
Two successive alert levels indicate that the
energy available has dropped to a low level.
For more information on the Indicators, and in
particular the Charge level indicator, refer to
the corresponding section.
Current consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
(miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh)
(Electric)
/
Calculated during the last few
seconds.
This function is only displayed at speeds above
19 mph (30 km/h).
Average consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l)
(miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh)
(Electric)
/
Calculated since the last trip
computer reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h)
Calculated since the last trip computer
reset.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes)
If your vehicle is fitted with the Stop & Start
function, a time counter calculates the time
spent in STOP mode during a journey.
The time counter is reset each time the ignition
is switched on.
Lighting dimmer
This system allows the brightness of the
instruments and controls to be adjusted
manually to suit the ambient light level.
► With the lamps on, adjust the brightness
of the lighting via the instrument panel menu,
using the steering-mounted controls.
For more information on the Configuration
menu, refer to the corresponding section.
Privacy Settings
This function allows the user to share, or not
share, data with the offboard.
The default setting is "No data sharing except
company vehicle".
Confidentiality settings can be accessed via
the instrument panel menu, using the steeringmounted controls.
There are three available modes.
For more information on the Configuration
menu, refer to the corresponding section.
"Sharing data and vehicle position"
This mode allows the vehicle to
externally transmit all the personal data needed
for each valid available connected service.
1
The personal data required to use the
connected services is sent to the
providers of these services.
"Only data sharing"
This mode allows the vehicle to
externally transmit all the data needed for each
valid available connected service, with the
exception of vehicle location data (e.g. GPS
coordinates).
data.
Some connected services may not
function without the vehicle location
This mode will not be applied to the
emergency call function or to specific
services to which the user has consented
under the terms of commercial contracts
(e.g. Connected alarm).
"No data sharing except company
vehicle"
This mode does not allow the vehicle to
transmit personal data outside the vehicle.
23
Dashboard instruments
Connected services will only perform
local processing inside the vehicle with
limited functions.
This mode will not be applied to the
emergency call function or to specific
services to which the user has consented
under the terms of commercial contracts
(e.g. Connected alarm).
Professional purposes
If the vehicle is used for professional
purposes or under the terms of specific
contracts (e.g. corporate fleet, government
assignment), some privacy modes will not
be available for the user on the screen,
depending on the data sharing needs of the
services.
Smartphone Station
The Smartphone Station system allows to
connect a smartphone with the vehicle's
equipment, such as the speakers.
Use the steering-mounted controls to manage
certain functions.
The user interface is provided by the
Smartphone Station feature integrated into
the MyCitroën App mobile application.
* Depending on country.
24
Once the mobile application has been installed
and the smartphone connected to the system,
it is possible to access the following functions
and customize the dashboard:
– Online Radio and Radio Tuner*.
– Phone (e.g. Contacts, Dialpad).
– Navigation (e.g. e-Routes, Waze).
– Media (e.g. Deezer, Amazon Music).
– Library (e.g. mp3 audio files).
– Calendar notifications (e.g. Google Calendar
for Android).
The system is not compatible with a
tablet or laptop.
During use, it is recommended charging the
smartphone via USB at the same time.
For safety reasons, certain functions
or operations requiring sustained
attention are not accessible when driving.
Operation
First use / Installation procedure
► Download the MyCitroën App mobile
application onto your smartphone from the
appropriate online store.
► Create a user account or re-use your current
MyCitroën account.
► Pull the right clamp arm 2 of the station and
install the smartphone against the left clamp
arm 1.
► Release the right clamp arm 2 against the
smartphone to secure it to the dashboard.
► Start the Smartphone Station feature,
read the legal and safety instructions and then
confirm them.
► Activate the Bluetooth® function on the
smartphone.
► With the ignition on, press and hold
button 3 to pair the smartphone with the
system (confirmed by the flashing light in blue
on the button).
► Select the system name "MyCitroën
XXXXXXX" from the list of devices detected
on the smartphone (the "X" characters
corresponds to the last digits of the VIN).
The connection is confirmed by the fixed
lighting in blue on the button 3.
Dashboard instruments
The system then suggests setting up automatic
reconnection using NFC technology. This
setting is optional.
To set the NFC parameters later, select
"Settings > General > Autolaunch" from
this menu.
NFC communication must first be
activated on the smartphone.
Finally, the application's home page appears.
Automatic reconnection
Thanks to NFC technology, the application can
be launched automatically if the smartphone
is already recognised by the system and if the
smartphone's NFC settings have already been
made with the system.
► Otherwise, press button 3 briefly to display
the application's home page.
Steering-mounted controls
Radio: next station (in the list of favourites
radio stations).
Media: next track.
Phone (short press): accept the incoming call.
Short press: validate a selection;
movement in the lists.
Radio: previous station (in the list of favourites
radio stations).
Media: previous track.
Phone (short press): refuse the incoming call;
hang up the call in progress.
Voice control:
Short press, voice commands of the
smartphone connected using Bluetooth® (Siri
with Apple®/Google Assistant with Android) via
the system.
Main controls
The main controls used on the various pages of
the Smartphone Station feature are as follows:
Access to menu (Phone, Online Radio,
Tutorials and Settings)
Exit of application
Increase volume.
Return to previous page
Decrease volume.
Close current page
Mute/Unmute the sound: short press in
the center.
Short press: validate a selection;
movement in the lists.
Search
A B C Search filters (alphabetical or numerical)
Refresh current page
Access to details
1
Adding or removing favourites
Random playback of media
Repeat media
Call via telephone keypad
Call via phonebook contacts
For more information on the various functions
of the Smartphone Station feature, refer to the
Tutorials section of the menu.
10-inch touch screen
This system gives access to the following
elements:
– Time and date.
– Settings for audio equipment.
– Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions.
– Audio equipment and telephone controls
with display of associated information.
– Connected services and display of associated
information.
– Voice recognition.
– Navigation system controls and display
of associated information (depending on
equipment).
25
Dashboard instruments
For safety reasons, always stop the
vehicle before performing operations
that require sustained attention.
Some functions are not accessible while
driving.
Recommendations
This screen uses capacitive sensing technology.
Do not use pointed objects on the touch
screen.
Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands.
► Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch
screen.
Main controls
On the right side
Power on/off
Screen on/off
Increase the volume
Decrease the volume
Mute/Unmute
26
On the left side
Access to the home page and to the
widgets wall
From any page, press the touch screen
with three fingers to display the
widgets wall.
In the screen
Close the current window
Return to the previous page
► To change the status of a function,
press the description for the
corresponding line (change confirmed by the
slider moving to the right/left: function
activated/deactivated).
► Depending on the pages displayed on the
screen, with or without the context menu, scroll
the text by swiping with your finger, as with a
smartphone.
Applications
Press the dedicated button on the left side:
Radio
Select a radio station (AM, FM and DAB).
Media
Select a sound source (USB, iPod®,
Bluetooth®, Apple®CarPlay® and Android Auto).
Phone
Connect a smartphone via Bluetooth®, make
and receive calls, access the contact list, call
history.
Navigation
(Depending on equipment)
Configure guidance and choose a destination.
Use the services available in real time
depending on equipment.
Settings
Main settings for the audio system,
touch screen and GPS.
To obtain more information about these
applications, refer to the sections describing
the audio and telematic systems.
Remotely operable
additional functions
(Electric)
(Depending on country of sale)
The following functions are
available from the MyCitroën
App application, which is
accessible from a smartphone:
– Managing the traction battery charging
(deferred charging).
– Managing the temperature pre-conditioning.
– Viewing the state of charge and range of the
vehicle.
Dashboard instruments
Installation procedure
► Download the MyCitroën App application
from the appropriate online store for your
smartphone.
► Create an account.
► Enter the vehicle identification number
(available on the vehicle registration
certificate).
For more information on Identification
markings, refer to the corresponding section.
1
Network coverage
In order to be able to use the various
remotely operable features, ensure that your
vehicle is located in an area covered by the
mobile network.
A lack of network coverage may prevent
communication with the vehicle (for
example, if it is in an underground car park).
In such cases, the application will display a
message indicating that the connection with
the vehicle could not be established.
27
Access
Remote control / Key
Unfolding / Folding the key
Remote control function
The remote control can be used to perform
the following remote functions (depending on
version):
– Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle.
– Opening the fuel tank cap.
– Activating/Deactivating the alarm.
– Locating the vehicle.
– Activating the vehicle’s electronic
immobiliser.
The remote control includes a conventional key
that allows the central unlocking/locking of the
vehicle using the door lock, as well as starting
and switching off the engine.
Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be
locked/unlocked in the event of a failure of the
remote control, the central locking, the battery,
etc. For more information on the Back-up
procedures, refer to the corresponding section.
► Press this button to unfold or fold the key.
The remote control may be damaged if
you do not press the button.
Unlocking the vehicle
► Press this button to unlock the
vehicle.
When the unlocking button is pressed, the
flashing of the direction indicators for a few
seconds signals:
– The unlocking of the vehicle for versions
without alarm.
– The deactivation of the alarm for other
versions.
Locking the vehicle
Normal locking
► Press this button.
28
When the locking button is pressed, the
lighting of the direction indicators for a few
seconds signals:
– The locking of the vehicle for versions
without alarm.
– The activation of the alarm for other versions.
If one of the doors or the boot is not
fully closed, the locking does not take
place. However, if the vehicle is equipped
with the alarm, it is fully activated after
about 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked inadvertently
and there is then no action on the doors
or boot, the vehicle will automatically lock
itself again after about 30 seconds. If the
alarm was activated beforehand, the alarm is
reactivated automatically.
Deadlocking
Deadlocking renders the interior door
controls inoperative. It also disables
the central locking button.
The horn remains operational.
Never leave anyone inside the vehicle when
it is deadlocked.
► Ignition off, press the locking button.
► Press the locking button again within
5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed
by the temporary lighting of the direction
indicators for versions without alarm).
Access
Advice
Remote control
The remote control is a sensitive, highfrequency device; avoid handling it in your
pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally
unlocking the vehicle.
Avoid pressing the remote control buttons
while out of range of the vehicle, due to
the risk of rendering the remote control
inoperative. It would then be necessary to
reset it.
The remote control does not work when the
key is in the ignition switch, even when the
ignition is switched off.
Anti-theft protection
Do not modify the electronic
vehicle immobiliser, as this might result in
malfunctions.
For vehicles with a key ignition switch,
remember to remove the key and turn the
steering wheel to engage the steering lock.
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked
could make it more difficult for the
emergency services to enter the passenger
compartment in an emergency.
As a safety precaution, remove the key from
the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even
for a short time.
Purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a
CITROËN dealer, to ensure that the keys in
your possession are the only ones able to
start the vehicle.
If one of the doors or the boot is still
open, central locking will not take
place.
However, if the vehicle is fitted with an
alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds.
If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors
or boot are not subsequently
opened, the vehicle will automatically lock
itself again after about 30 seconds. If the
vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will be
reactivated automatically.
Back-up procedures
Lost keys, remote control
Go to a CITROËN dealer with the vehicle's
registration certificate, your personal
identification documents and if possible, the
label bearing the key code.
The CITROËN dealer will be able to retrieve the
key code and the transponder code, enabling a
new key to be ordered.
Complete unlocking/locking
of the vehicle with the key
2
Use this procedure in the following situations:
– Remote control battery discharged.
– Remote control malfunction.
– Vehicle battery discharged.
– Vehicle in an area subject to strong
electromagnetic interference.
In the first case, change the remote control
battery.
In the second case, reinitialise the remote
control.
Refer to the corresponding sections.
► Insert the key into the door lock.
► Turn the key towards the front/rear to
unlock/lock the vehicle.
► Turn the key towards the rear again within
5 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
29
Access
If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it
will not be activated when locking
with the key.
If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds
when the door is opened; switch on the
ignition to stop it.
Refer to the corresponding section.
Battery type: CR2032/3 volts.
► Remove the black cap, located on the edge
of the door, using the key.
► Insert the key into the socket without
forcing it, then turn the latch towards the inside
of the door.
► Remove the key and refit the black cap.
► Close the doors and check from the outside
that the vehicle is locked.
► Unclip the cover by inserting a small
screwdriver in the slot and lift the cover.
► Remove the flat battery from its housing.
► Put the new battery in place, respecting the
polarity. Start by inserting it into the contacts
located in the corner, then clip the cover onto
the unit.
► Reinitialise the remote control.
For more information on Reinitialising the
remote control, refer to the corresponding
section.
Central locking not
functioning
Use these procedures in the following cases:
– Central locking malfunction.
– Battery disconnected or discharged.
In the event of a malfunction of the
central locking system, the battery
must be disconnected to ensure that the
vehicle is locked fully.
Front left-hand door
► Insert the key into the door lock.
► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle
to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
Other doors
Unlocking
► Pull the interior door opening control.
Locking
► Open the doors.
► For the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on.
30
Changing the battery
A message is displayed on the instrument panel
when the battery needs changing.
If the battery is flat, this warning lamp
comes on, accompanied by an audible
signal and the display of a message.
Do not throw remote control batteries
away, as they contain metals that are
harmful to the environment. Take them to an
approved disposal point.
Access
This equipment contains a button type
battery.
Do not swallow the battery. Risk of chemical
burns!
Swallowing the battery can cause serious
internal burning in only 2 hours and can be
fatal.
If batteries have been swallowed or inserted
into a part of the body, seek immediate
medical advice.
Keep new and used batteries out of the
reach of children.
If the battery compartment does not close
properly, stop using the product and keep it
out of the reach of children.
Risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type!
Replace the battery with the same type.
Risk of explosion or leaking of
inflammable liquid or gas!
Do not use in/store in/place in an
environment where the temperature is
extremely high or where the pressure is
extremely low due to very high altitude.
Do not try to burn, crush or cut a used
battery.
Reinitialising the remote
control
Following replacement of the battery or in
the event of a fault, it may be necessary to
reinitialise the remote control.
Doors
Opening
2
From outside
► After unlocking the vehicle using the remote
control or the key, pull the door handle.
From inside
► Pull the interior opening control of a door;
this unlocks the vehicle completely.
Boot
Opening
► Switch the ignition off.
► Turn the key to position 3 (Ignition on).
► Immediately press the closed padlock
button for a few seconds.
► Switch off the ignition and remove the key
from the ignition switch.
The remote control is now fully operational
again.
► With the vehicle unlocked, press the central
tailgate control.
► Lift the tailgate.
Closing
► Lower the tailgate using one of the interior
grab handles.
31
Access
In the event of a malfunction or if you
experience difficulty opening or
closing the tailgate, have it checked by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop
without delay, to avoid the issue
deteriorating and prevent any risk of the
tailgate dropping, potentially causing serious
injury.
In the event of a fault with the central
locking system, it is essential to
disconnect the battery to lock the boot and
so ensure complete locking of the vehicle.
Central locking
Back-up release
To manually unlock the boot in the event of a
battery or central locking failure.
Automatic (anti-intrusion
security)
Unlocking
The doors and boot lock automatically while
driving (speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)).
► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock
from inside the boot.
Manual
► Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the
lock to unlock the boot.
► Move the latch to the left.
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot
will remain locked.
32
When locking/deadlocking from the
outside
When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked
from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes
and the button is deactivated.
► After normal locking, pull one of the
interior door controls to unlock the vehicle.
► After deadlocking, you must use the
remote control to unlock the vehicle.
► Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle
(doors and boot) from inside the passenger
compartment.
The indicator lamp comes on to confirm the
central locking of the vehicle.
Central locking does not take place if
any of the front doors or rear doors are
open (opening the boot does not prevent
the central locking from operating).
Transporting long or voluminous
objects
Press the central locking control to drive
with the boot open and the doors locked.
Otherwise, every time the speed of the
vehicle exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), the sound
of the locks rebounding will be heard and an
alert will be displayed.
Pressing the central locking button unlocks
the vehicle.
Above 5 mph (8 km/h), this unlocking is
temporary.
Access
Alarm
Electric vehicles
Depending on version, interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring may
be reduced or even suspended during
temperature pre-conditioning sequences.
Self-protection function
System which protects and provides a deterrent
against theft and break-ins.
Exterior perimeter monitoring
The system checks for opening of the vehicle.
The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a
door, the boot or the bonnet, for example.
Interior volumetric monitoring
The system checks for any variation in volume
in the passenger compartment.
The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a
window, enters the passenger compartment or
moves inside the vehicle.
Anti-tilt monitoring
The system checks for any change in the
attitude of the vehicle.
The alarm goes off if the vehicle is lifted or
moved.
When the vehicle is parked, the alarm
will not be triggered if the vehicle is
knocked.
The system checks whether any of its
components are out of service.
The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central
control or the siren wiring is put out of service
or damaged.
Work on the alarm system
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Locking the vehicle with full
alarm system
Activation
► Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle.
► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the
remote control.
When the monitoring system is active, the red
indicator lamp in the button flashes once per
second and the direction indicators come on
for about 2 seconds.
The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated
after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric and
anti-tilt monitoring after 45 seconds.
Door, boot or bonnet
If an opening is not properly closed,
the vehicle is not locked, but the exterior
perimeter monitoring will be activated after
45 seconds, at the same time as the interior
volumetric and anti-tilt monitoring.
2
Deactivation
► Press the remote control unlocking
button.
The monitoring system is deactivated: the
indicator lamp in the button goes off and the
direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
After unlocking using the remote
control
If the vehicle automatically locks itself again
(as happens if a door or the boot is not
opened within 30 seconds of unlocking),
the monitoring system is automatically
activated.
Locking the vehicle
with exterior perimeter
monitoring only
Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring
to avoid the unwanted triggering of the alarm,
in certain cases such as:
– Presence of an occupant or a pet.
– Slightly open window.
– Washing the vehicle.
33
Access
– Changing a wheel.
– Towing the vehicle.
– Transport on a ship or ferry.
Deactivating the interior volumetric
and anti-tilt monitoring
► Switch off the ignition and within 10
seconds press the alarm button until its red
indicator lamp is on fixed.
► Get out of the vehicle.
► Immediately lock the vehicle using the
remote control.
Only the exterior perimeter monitoring is
activated; the button's red indicator lamp
flashes once every second.
To take effect, this deactivation must
be carried out after each time the
ignition is switched off.
Reactivating the interior volumetric
and anti-tilt monitoring
► Deactivate the exterior perimeter
monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using the
remote control.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
► Reactivate all monitoring by locking the
vehicle using the remote control.
The red indicator lamp in the button once again
flashes every second.
34
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and
flashing of the direction indicators for 30
seconds.
Depending on the country of sale, certain
monitoring functions remain active until
the alarm has been triggered eleven times
consecutively.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control, rapid flashing of the red indicator
lamp in the button informs you that the alarm
was triggered during your absence. When the
ignition is switched on, this flashing stops.
► To avoid triggering the alarm on entering
the vehicle, press the unlocking button on the
remote control.
Malfunction
When the ignition is switched on, the fixed
lighting of the red indicator lamp in the button
indicates a system malfunction.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Electric windows
Failure of the remote control
To deactivate the monitoring functions:
► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the front
left-hand door lock.
► Open the door; the alarm is triggered.
► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Locking the vehicle without
activating the alarm
► Lock the vehicle using the key in the front
left-hand door lock.
Automatic activation
(Depending on version)
The system is activated automatically 2 minutes
after the last door or the boot is closed.
1. Left-hand front
2. Right-hand front
3. Right-hand rear
4. Left-hand rear
5. Deactivation of electric window controls
located by rear seats
Access
Manual operation
► To open/close the window, press/pull the
switch without passing the point of resistance;
the window stops as soon as the switch is
released.
Automatic operation
(Depending on version, for driver only)
► To open/close the window, press/pull the
switch past its resistance point: the window
opens/closes completely when the switch is
released.
Operating the switch again stops the
movement of the window.
Window controls remain operational
for approximately 45 seconds after
switching off the ignition or after locking the
vehicle.
After that time, the controls are disabled. To
reactivate them, switch on the ignition or
unlock the vehicle.
Anti-pinch
(Depending on version, for driver only)
If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it
stops and immediately partially lowers again.
Overtaking of the anti-pinch
After triggering the anti-pinch, check
that there are no obstacles blocking the
movement of the window.
Try to close the window again.
If the window closing is interrupted by the
anti-pinch 3 times in a row (max. 10 seconds
between each action), the anti-pinch
function becomes inoperable.
Without this protection, the window can
only be closed manually - risk of injury!
Deactivating the rear
controls for the rear electric
windows
For your children's safety, ignition on or engine
on, press control 5 to deactivate the controls
for the rear electric windows, irrespective of
their positions.
The red indicator lamp in the button comes
on and a confirmation message is displayed.
The lamp will remain lit until the controls are
reactivated.
The rear electric windows can still be controlled
using the driver's controls.
Reinitialising the electric
windows
After reconnecting the battery, or in the event
of abnormal window movement, the anti-pinch
function must be reinitialised.
Automatic window closing is no longer
available, only manual closing is
possible.
Remote window closing with the electronic
key is also no longer available in this case.
2
The anti-pinch function is inoperable during
the following sequence of operations.
For each window:
► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will
rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the
control is pressed. Repeat the operation until
the window is fully closed.
► Continue to pull the control for at least one
second after the window reaches the closed
position.
If an electric window meets an
obstacle during operation, the
movement of the window must be reversed.
To do this, press the relevant control.
When the driver operates the passengers’
electric window controls, it is important to
ensure that nothing can prevent the window
from closing properly.
It is important to ensure that passengers use
the electric windows correctly.
Pay particular attention to children when
operating the windows.
Be aware of passengers and/or other persons
present when closing windows remotely
using the electronic key.
35
Access
Do not put your head or arms through the
open windows when the vehicle is moving risk of serious injury!
36
Ease of use and comfort
Correct driving position
Front head restraints
Adjusting the height
3
Refitting a head restraint
► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides
in the corresponding seat backrest.
► Push the head restraint fully down.
► Press the lug A to release the head restraint
and push it down.
► Adjust the height of the head restraint.
Before taking to the road and to make the
most of the ergonomic layout, carry out these
adjustments in the following order:
– head restraint height.
– seat backrest angle.
– seat cushion height.
– longitudinal seat position.
– steering wheel reach and then height.
– rear view mirror and door mirrors.
Once these adjustments have been
made, check that the "head-up"
instrument panel can be viewed correctly
over the steering wheel.
► Press lug A to release the head restraint and
raise it fully.
► Stow the head restraint securely.
Never drive with the head restraints
removed; they should be in place and
adjusted for the occupant of the seat.
Front seats
Upwards:
► Pull the head restraint up to the desired
position; you can feel the head restraint clicking
into position.
Downwards:
► Press lug A to lower the head restraint.
The head restraint is correctly adjusted
when its upper edge is level with the
top of the occupant's head.
Removing a head restraint
For safety reasons, seat adjustments
must only be made when the vehicle is
stationary.
Before moving the seat backwards,
ensure that there is no person or
object that might prevent the full travel of
the seat.
There is a risk of trapping or pinching
passengers if present in the rear seats or of
jamming the seat if large objects are placed
on the floor behind the seat.
► Pull the head restraint fully up.
37
Ease of use and comfort
Longitudinal
► Pull the control upwards to raise or push
it downwards to lower, until you obtain the
position required.
Heated seats
► Raise the control bar and slide the seat
forwards or backwards.
► Release the control bar to lock the seat in
position on one of the notches.
Backrest angle
► Push the control backwards and tilt the
backrest forwards or backwards to obtain the
desired angle.
Height
(driver only)
38
The function is active only with the engine
running and when the outside temperature is
below 20°C.
► Press the button corresponding to the seat.
► Each press changes the heating level; the
corresponding number of indicator lamps come
on.
► To switch off the heating, press the button
until all of the indicator lamps are off.
Do not use the function when the seat
is not occupied.
Reduce the heating intensity as soon as
possible.
When the seat and passenger compartment
have reached a satisfactory temperature,
switch the function off; reducing electrical
consumption in turn decreases energy
consumption.
Prolonged use of heated seats is not
recommended for people with
sensitive skin.
There is a risk of burns for people whose
perception of heat is impaired (e.g. illness,
taking medication).
To keep the heated pad intact and to
prevent a short circuit:
– Do not place heavy or sharp objects on
the seat.
– Do not kneel or stand on the seat.
– Do not spill liquids onto the seat.
– Never use the heating function if the seat
is damp.
Rear bench seat
Rear head restraints
They have two positions:
– A high position, for when the seat is in use:
► Pull the head restraint fully up.
– A low position, for stowing, when the seat is
not in use:
Ease of use and comfort
► Press the lug A to release the head
restraint and push it down.
The rear head restraints can be removed.
Removing a head restraint
► Release the backrest using control 1.
► Tilt the backrest slightly forwards.
► Pull the head restraint fully up.
► Press the lug A to release the head restraint
and remove it completely.
Refitting a head restraint
► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides
in the corresponding backrest.
► Push the head restraint fully down.
► Press the lug A to release the head restraint
and push it down.
Never drive with passengers seated at
the rear when the head restraints are
removed; the head restraints should be in
place and in the high position.
The head restraint for the centre seat
and those for the outer seats are not
interchangeable.
Folding the backrests
Manoeuvring the backrests should
only be done when the vehicle is
stationary.
First steps:
► Lower the head restraints.
► If necessary, move the front seats forward.
► Check that no person or object might
interfere with the folding of the backrests
(e.g. clothing, luggage).
► Check that the seat belts are free, not
engaged in the buckles. Release them so that
the backrest can be moved.
To obtain the flattest possible surface
or if you load on the backrest, remove
the head restraint(s) from the backrest.
3
One-piece backrest
For versions with 2/3-1/3 backrest:
► Pull the strap 1 firmly to release the
backrest.
► Guide the backrest 2 down to the horizontal
position.
For versions with one-piece backrest:
► Pull the two straps 1 simultaneously and
firmly to release the backrest.
► Guide the backrest 2 down to the horizontal
position.
If you are alone to carry out the
manoeuvre, remove the rear shelf, then
carry out the operation from the rear of the
boot.
Repositioning the backrests
2/3-1/3 backrest
First check that the outer seat belts
are lying vertically flat alongside the
backrest latching rings.
39
Ease of use and comfort
► Put the backrest 2 in the upright position
and push it firmly to latch it home.
► Check that the release strap 1 has correctly
returned to its position.
► Ensure that the outer seat belts were not
trapped during the operation.
Please note: an incorrectly latched
backrest compromises the safety of
passengers in the event of sudden braking or
an accident.
The contents of the boot may be thrown
forwards - risk of serious injury!
Steering wheel
adjustment
► Adjust the height and reach to suit your
driving position.
► Push the control to lock the steering wheel.
For safety reasons, these adjustments
must only be carried out with the
vehicle stationary.
Heated steering wheel
(Depending on country of sale)
In cold weather, this function heats the circular
part of the steering wheel.
It can be activated when the outside
temperature is below 20°C.
Mirrors
Door mirrors
As a safety measure, the mirrors
should be adjusted to reduce the
"blind spots".
The objects that you see in the mirrors are
in fact closer than they appear. Take this
into account in order to correctly judge
the distance of vehicles approaching from
behind.
Adjustment
► With the engine running, press this button
to activate/deactivate the function (confirmed
by the indicator lamp coming on/going out).
► When stationary, pull the control to release
the steering wheel.
40
► Move control A to the right or to the left to
select the corresponding mirror.
Ease of use and comfort
► Move control B in any of the four directions
to adjust.
► Return control A to its central position.
Manual folding
The mirrors can be folded manually (parking
obstruction, narrow garage, etc.).
► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle.
Electric folding
Depending on equipment, the door mirrors can
be folded electrically.
► From the inside, with the
ignition on, place control A in
the central position.
► Pull control A backwards.
Demisting/Defrosting
Interior rear view mirror
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which
darkens the mirror glass and reduces the
nuisance to the driver caused by the sun,
headlamps of other vehicles, etc.
Manual model
Day/night position
► Lock the vehicle from the outside.
If the mirrors are folded using control
A, they will not unfold when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Electric unfolding
► From outside: unlock the vehicle.
► From inside: with the ignition on, place
control A in the central position and then pull
it rearwards.
Activation/Deactivation
The automatic door mirror folding/unfolding
function is configured via the instrument panel
menu, using the steering-mounted controls.
Automatic "electrochrome" model
The demisting/defrosting of the door
mirrors works with the demisting/
defrosting of the rear screen.
For more information on Rear screen
demisting/defrosting, refer to the
corresponding section.
► Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle
"night" position.
► Push the lever to change to the normal "day"
position.
Adjustment
► Adjust the mirror to the normal "day"
position.
3
The electrochrome system uses a sensor that
detects the level of exterior brightness and that
coming from the rear of the vehicle, in order
to automatically and gradually switch between
day and night usage.
To ensure optimum visibility while
manoeuvring, the mirror automatically
brightens when reverse gear is engaged.
The system is inoperative if the load in the
boot exceeds the height of the load space
cover or if the load space cover has items
placed on it.
Heating and Ventilation
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger
compartment is filtered and originates either
from the exterior, via the grille located at the
base of the windscreen, or from the inside in air
recirculation mode.
41
Ease of use and comfort
Controls
The controls are grouped together on the
centre console panel.
The demisting/defrosting controls for the
windscreen and the rear screen are located
below the touch screen, or on the centre
console panel located below the audio system.
Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents
2. Front side window demisting/defrosting
vents
3. Adjustable and closable side air vents
4. Adjustable and closable central air vents
5. Air outlets to the front footwells
Advice
Using the ventilation and air
conditioning system
► To ensure that air is distributed evenly,
keep the external air intake grilles at the
base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the
vents, the air outlets and the air extractor in
the boot free from obstructions.
► Do not cover the sunshine sensor located
on the dashboard; this sensor is used to
regulate the automatic air conditioning
system.
► Operate the air conditioning system
for at least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a
month to keep it in good working order.
► If the system does not produce cold air,
switch it off and contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
When towing a large load on a steep
gradient in high temperatures, switching off
the air conditioning increases the available
engine power, enhancing the towing
capacity.
Avoid driving for too long with the
ventilation off or with prolonged
operation of interior air recirculation. Risk of
misting and deterioration of the air quality!
If the interior temperature is very high
after the vehicle has stood for a long
42
time in the sunshine, air the passenger
compartment for a few moments.
Put the air flow control at a setting high
enough to quickly change the air in the
passenger compartment.
Condensation created by the air
conditioning results in a discharge of
water underneath the vehicle. This is
perfectly normal.
Servicing the ventilation and air
conditioning system
► Ensure that the passenger compartment
filter is in good condition and have the filter
elements replaced regularly.
We recommend using a composite
passenger compartment filter. Its specific
active additive helps protect against
polluting gases and bad smells.
► To ensure correct operation of the
air conditioning system, have it checked
according to the recommendations in the
Manufacturer’s service schedule.
Stop & Start / e-Auto mode
Temporarily deactivate the
corresponding system to maintain a
comfortable temperature in the passenger
compartment.
For more information, refer to the
corresponding section.
Ease of use and comfort
Electric vehicles
Selecting the ECO driving mode
reduces electrical energy consumption, but
restricts the performance of the heating and
air conditioning systems, although it does
not deactivate them.
Heating/Manual air
conditioning
Adjusting the air flow
► Turn the thumbwheel 2 to obtain a
sufficient air flow to ensure your comfort.
If the air flow control is in the
minimum position (system
deactivated), the temperature in the vehicle
will no longer be controlled. A slight flow of
air can still be felt, due to the forward
movement of the vehicle.
Adjusting the air
distribution
Central and side air vents
The heating/manual air conditioning operate
in Accessories mode and when the engine is
running.
1. Air distribution adjustment
2. Air flow adjustment
3. Temperature adjustment
4. Air conditioning on/off
5. Recirculation of interior air
6. Rear screen demisting / defrosting
Adjusting the temperature
► Turn the knob 3 from blue (cold) to red (hot).
Central and side air vents and footwells
Footwells
Windscreen and side windows and
footwells
Windscreen and side windows
► Turn the knob 1 to select the desired air
outlet.
Recirculation of interior air
The intake of exterior air helps avoid and
eliminate misting of the windscreen and side
windows.
The recirculation of interior air allows the
passenger compartment to be isolated from
polluted air in areas of heavy traffic and inside
tunnels.
3
When required, this function also
allows faster heating or cooling of the
air in the passenger compartment.
► Rotate the selector 5 to allow the interior
air recirculation (right) or the intake of exterior
air (left).
Avoid the prolonged recirculation of
interior air in order to ensure a good
supply of fresh air and reduce the risk of
misting (especially when several passengers
are on board or when the air is cold/damp,
etc.).
Air conditioning on/off
The air conditioning system is designed to
operate effectively in all seasons, with the
windows closed:
– It lowers the temperature in summer.
– It increases the effectiveness of the
demisting, in winter, above 3°C.
► Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air
conditioning system.
Air conditioning does not operate
when the air flow is deactivated.
To obtain cool air more quickly, enable
interior air recirculation for a brief period.
Then return to the intake of exterior air.
43
Ease of use and comfort
Switching off the air conditioning may result
in some discomfort (humidity or misting).
OFF.
The air conditioning cannot operate
when the air flow adjustment is set to
Automatic air
conditioning
The air conditioning operates with the engine
running, but the ventilation and its controls can
be accessed with the ignition on.
With the air conditioning on, regulation of
temperature and interior air recirculation are
controlled manually.
1. Automatic air conditioning on/off
2. Temperature adjustment
3. Front demisting / defrosting
4. Air distribution adjustment
5. Maximum A/C
6. Interior air recirculation
7. Rear screen demisting / defrosting
8. Air conditioning on/off
44
9. Air flow adjustment
Automatic air conditioning
This automatic mode ensures optimum
management of the passenger compartment
temperature, air flow and air distribution, based
on the selected comfort level.
► Press the button 1-AUTO to activate/
deactivate the automatic mode of the air
conditioning system.
In cold weather with the engine cold,
the air flow is increased gradually until
the comfort setting has been reached, in
order to limit the delivery of cold air into the
passenger compartment.
On entering the vehicle, if the interior
temperature is much colder or warmer
than the comfort setting requested, there
is no need to alter the value displayed to
more quickly reach the required level of
comfort. The system automatically corrects
the temperature difference as quickly as
possible.
Temperature adjustment
► Push the button 2 up to increase the value
or down to decrease it.
The value displayed corresponds to a level of
comfort and not to a precise temperature.
Air distribution adjustment
► Pushing button 4 successively directs the air
flow towards:
– windscreen, side windows and footwells.
– footwells.
– central vents, side vents and footwells.
– windscreen, side windows, central vents, side
vents and footwells.
– central and side vents.
– windscreen and side windows (demisting or
defrosting).
Maximum air conditioning
This function automatically adjusts the
temperature setting to the lowest possible, the
air distribution towards the central and side air
vents, the air flow to maximum and activates
interior air recirculation.
► Press button 5 to activate/deactivate the
function.
Recirculation of interior air
The intake of exterior air helps avoid and
eliminate misting of the windscreen and side
windows.
The recirculation of interior air allows the
passenger compartment to be isolated from
polluted air in areas of heavy traffic and inside
tunnels.
When required, this function also
allows faster heating or cooling of the
air in the passenger compartment.
Ease of use and comfort
► Press button 6 to recirculate the interior air
or allow the intake of exterior air.
Avoid the prolonged recirculation of
interior air in order to ensure a good
supply of fresh air and reduce the risk of
misting (especially when several passengers
are on board or when the air is cold/damp,
etc.).
Air conditioning on / off
The air conditioning system is designed to
operate effectively in all seasons, with the
windows closed.
It is used to:
– lower the temperature in summer.
– increase the effectiveness of the demisting in
winter, above 3°C.
► Press button 8 to turn the air conditioning
on/off.
OFF.
The air conditioning cannot operate
when the air flow adjustment is set to
Air flow adjustment
► Push the button 9 up to increase the air flow
or down to decrease it.
The air flow symbol is filled in or emptied
gradually, according to the value set.
Front demisting/
defrosting
This mode allows the windscreen and side
windows to be demisted or defrosted as quickly
as possible.
► Depending on equipment, turn the
knob or press this button to activate/
deactivate the mode (confirmed by the
illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp).
The mode automatically manages the air
conditioning, air flow, air intake and distributes
ventilation optimally to the windscreen and
side windows.
With Stop & Start, when demisting has
been activated, STOP mode is not
available.
In wintry conditions, before moving
off, it is essential to remove any snow
or ice from the windscreen around the
camera.
Otherwise, the operation of the equipment
using the camera may be affected.
Rear screen demisting/
defrosting
This demisting/defrosting only works with the
engine running.
Depending on version, it also demists/defrosts
the door mirrors.
► Press this button to activate/
deactivate the function (confirmed by
the indicator lamp coming on/switching off).
The function can be activated whatever the
outside temperature may be.
The period of operation depends on the outside
temperature.
Demisting/defrosting therefore switches
off automatically to prevent an excessive
consumption of electrical current.
3
Heated windscreen
In cold weather, this system heats the bottom
of the windscreen, as well as the area alongside
the left-hand windscreen pillar.
Without changing the settings for the air
conditioning system, it allows faster release
of the windscreen wiper blades when they
are frozen to the windscreen and helps avoid
the accumulation of snow resulting from the
operation of the windscreen wipers.
45
Ease of use and comfort
Switching on/off
► With the engine running, press this button
to activate/deactivate the function (confirmed
by an indicator lamp).
The function is activated when the outside
temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated
automatically when the engine is switched off.
Temperature preconditioning (Electric)
This function allows you to programme the
temperature in the passenger compartment
to reach a pre-defined, non-modifiable
temperature (approx. 21°C) before you enter the
vehicle, on the days and at the times of your
choice.
This function is available when the vehicle is
connected or not connected.
46
Programming
The programming is carried out from a
smartphone via the MyCitroën App
application.
For more information on Remotely
operable additional functions, refer to the
corresponding section.
The pre-conditioning sequence begins
approximately 45 minutes before the
programmed time when the vehicle is
connected (20 minutes when it is not
connected) and is maintained for 10 minutes
after.
You can set multiple programmes.
Each one is saved in the system.
To optimise the driving range, we
recommend starting a programme while the
vehicle is connected.
The fan noise that occurs during
temperature pre-conditioning is
perfectly normal.
Operating conditions
– The function is only activated when the
ignition is switched off and the vehicle
locked.
– When the vehicle is not connected, the
function is only activated if the battery charge
level is greater than 30%.
– When the vehicle is not connected and
a recurring programme is active (e.g. from
Monday to Friday), if two temperature preconditioning sequences are run without the
vehicle being used, the programme will be
deactivated.
Courtesy lamps
1. Front courtesy lamp
2. Front reading lamps
Front courtesy lamp
In this position, the courtesy lamp comes
on gradually:
– when the vehicle is unlocked.
– when the key is removed from the ignition
switch.
– when a door is opened.
– when the remote control locking button is
activated, in order to locate the vehicle.
It switches off gradually:
– when the vehicle is locked.
– when the ignition is switched on.
– 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Ease of use and comfort
Permanent lighting.
In "Permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time
varies according to the circumstances:
– With the ignition off, approximately
10 minutes.
– In energy saving mode, approximately
30 seconds.
– With the engine running, unlimited.
Reading lamps
2. Glove box
3. 12 V accessory socket (max. 120 W)
4. USB socket
5. Open storage with double cup holder
6. Front armrest (depending on version)
7. Storage trays
8. Mats (depending on version)
Sun visor
► With the ignition on, operate the
corresponding switch.
The sun visors are fitted with a vanity mirror
with concealing flap.
Do not place anything against the
courtesy lamps.
Glove box
Interior fittings
► To open the glove box, lift the handle.
With the ignition on, the glove box is lit when
open.
Never drive with the glove box open
when a passenger is at the front. It
may cause injury during sharp deceleration!
► Plug in a 12 V accessory (with a maximum
rated power of 120 W) using a suitable adapter.
3
Observe the maximum power rating to
avoid damaging the accessory.
The connection of an electrical device
not approved by CITROËN, such as a
USB charger, may adversely affect the
operation of vehicle electrical systems,
causing faults such as poor radio reception
or interference with displays in the screens.
USB sockets
These symbols determine the type of use of a
USB socket:
Power supply and recharging.
Likewise, plus exchange of multimedia
data with the audio system.
Likewise, plus use of smartphone
applications with the touch screen.
12 V accessory sockets
1. Sun visor
Depending on equipment, the vehicle is fitted
with:
– One or two USB sockets on the dashboard.
47
Ease of use and comfort
– One USB socket on the centre console.
– One or two USB sockets on the 2nd row.
Wireless smartphone
charger
When the portable device is detected, the
charger’s indicator lamp lights up green. It
remains lit for the whole time that the battery
is being charged.
State of the
indicator lamp
Meaning
Off
Engine switched off.
No compatible devices
detected.
Charging complete.
Fixed green
Compatible portable
device detected.
Charging.
Flashing orange
Foreign object detected
in the charging zone.
Portable device not well
centred in the charging
zone.
Fixed orange
Malfunction of the
portable device's battery
meter.
Device battery
temperature too high.
Charger malfunction.
The system is not designed to charge
multiple devices simultaneously.
Do not leave metal objects (e.g. coins,
keys, vehicle remote control) in the
charging area while a device is being
charged - Risk of overheating or interrupting
the charging!
This system allows wireless charging of a
portable device such as a smartphone, using
the magnetic induction principle, in accordance
with the Qi standard.
The portable device to be charged must be
compatible with the Qi standard, either by
design or by using a compatible holder or shell.
A mat can also be used provided that it is
approved by the Manufacturer.
The charging area is identified by the Qi
symbol.
The charger works with the engine running and
with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode.
Charging is managed by the smartphone.
Charging
► With the charging area clear, place a device
in its centre.
48
When using applications for a long
time in combination with wireless
charging, some smartphones may switch to
thermal safety and cause some functions to
stop.
Checking operation
The state of the indicator lamp allows the
operation of the charger to be monitored.
If the indicator lamp is fixed orange:
– remove the device, then place it back in the
centre of the charging zone.
or
– remove the device and try again in a quarter
of an hour.
Ease of use and comfort
If the problem persists, have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Clothes hooks
They are located above each rear door.
Mats
Fitting
Removing/refitting
► To remove it on the driver's side, move the
seat backwards and unclip the fasteners.
► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by
pressing down.
► Check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming the
pedals:
– Only use mats which are suited to the
fixings already present in the vehicle; these
fixings must be used.
– Never fit one mat on top of another.
The use of mats not approved by CITROËN
may interfere with access to the pedals and
hinder the operation of the cruise control/
speed limiter.
The approved mats have two fasteners
located underneath the seat.
Boot fittings
3
1. Rear shelf
2. Hooks
3. Storage box
4. Lighting
5. Stowing rings
When fitting it on the driver's side, only use
the mountings present on the carpet (a "click"
indicates proper locking).
The other mats are simply laid over the carpet.
49
Ease of use and comfort
Rear shelf
To remove the shelf:
► Unhook the 2 cords.
► Gently raise the shelf, then remove it.
There are several ways of storing it:
– Either upright behind the front seats.
– Or flat on the bottom of the boot.
Hooks
They are used to hang shopping bags.
Take care to only hang lightweight
bags.
Boot lamp
It comes on automatically when the boot is
opened and goes off automatically when the
boot is closed.
The lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
50
– When the ignition is off, approximately
10 minutes.
– In energy saving mode, approximately
30 seconds.
– With the engine running, unlimited.
Lighting and visibility
Exterior lighting control
stalk
In lamps off and sidelamps modes, pull the
lighting control stalk to switch the main beam
headlamps on directly ("headlamp flash").
Main lighting
Display
► To select the main lighting mode: turn the
ring up/down to the desired position.
Illumination of the corresponding indicator
lamp on the instrument panel confirms that the
selected lighting is on.
A fault with a lamp is signalled by the
permanent illumination of this warning
lamp, accompanied by the display of a message
and an audible signal.
Rear foglamps
They only work if the dipped or main
beam headlamps are on.
Sidelamps only
Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime
running lamps
Dipped or main beam headlamps
Headlamp dipping
► Push the selector up/down to turn them on/
off.
The selector automatically returns to its initial
position.
When the lighting is switched off automatically
("AUTO" position) the foglamps remain on.
Front foglamps and rear
foglamp
4
► Push the selector:
– up a 1st time to switch on the front foglamps.
– up a 2nd time to switch on the rear foglamp.
– down a 1st time to switch off the rear foglamp.
– down a 2nd time to switch off the front
foglamps.
The selector automatically returns to its initial
position.
When the lamps are switched off automatically
(with "AUTO" position) or when the dipped
beam headlamps are switched off manually, the
foglamps and sidelamps remain on.
► Push the selector down to switch the
foglamps off; the sidelamps will then switch off.
Switching on the foglamps is
prohibited in clear weather or in rain,
both day and night. In these situations, the
power of their beams may dazzle other
drivers. They must only be used in fog or
► Pull the lighting control stalk to switch
between dipped and main beam headlamps.
51
Lighting and visibility
falling snow (rules may vary depending on
country).
Do not forget to switch off the foglamps
when they are no longer necessary.
Switching on the lamps after
switching off the ignition
To reactivate the lighting control, rotate
the ring to the "AUTO" position, then to the
desired position.
If the driver's door is opened, a temporary
audible signal warns the driver that the
lamps are on.
They will go off automatically after a period
of time that depends on the level of charge
in the battery (entering energy economy
mode).
Switching off of the lighting when
the ignition is switched off
When the ignition is switched off, all of the
lamps turn off immediately, except for the
dipped beam headlamps if automatic guideme-home lighting is activated.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), misting on
the internal surface of the glass of the
headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will
disappear after the lamps have been on for a
few minutes.
52
Never look too closely at the light
beam of LED technology lamps - risk of
serious eye injury!
In daytime running lamps mode, the
light-emitting diodes are brighter.
Direction indicators
Travelling abroad
If planning to use your vehicle in a
country that drives on the other side of the
road, the dipped beam headlamps must be
adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming drivers.
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
► Left or right: lower or raise the lighting
control stalk, beyond the point of resistance.
If you keep the direction indicators on
for more than 20 seconds, the volume
of the audible signal will increase if the
speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h).
Daytime running lamps/
Sidelamps
Three flashes
These lamps at the front and rear of the vehicle
light up automatically when the engine starts.
They perform the following functions:
– Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk
at position "AUTO" with adequate ambient
light).
– Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position
"AUTO" with low ambient light or "Sidelamps
only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps").
Automatic illumination of
lamps
► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without
going beyond the point of resistance; the
direction indicators will flash 3 times.
With the lighting control stalk in the “AUTO”
position and if a low level of exterior brightness
is detected by the rain/sunshine sensor, the
Lighting and visibility
number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped
beam headlamps are switched on automatically,
without any action on the part of the driver.
They may also come on if rain is detected, at
the same time as automatic operation of the
windscreen wipers.
As soon as the brightness returns to a
sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers
are switched off, the lamps are switched off
automatically.
Switching on/off
► To activate it, turn the ring to the "AUTO"
position.
► To deactivate it, turn the ring to any other
position.
When the function is activated or deactivated,
a message is displayed (depending on version).
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction of the rain/
sunshine sensor, the vehicle’s lamps
come on and this warning lamp is displayed on
the instrument panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and/or the display of a message.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor
located at the top centre of the
windscreen behind the interior rear view
mirror; the associated functions would no
longer be controlled.
via the instrument panel, using the steeringmounted controls.
Manual
4
In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine
sensor may detect sufficient light. For
this reason, the lighting will not come on
automatically.
The inner surface of the windscreen
may become misted up and affect the
proper operation of the rain/sunshine sensor.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Guide-me-home and
welcome lighting
Guide-me-home lighting
Automatic
With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the
"AUTO" position and when the light is poor, the
sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps come
on automatically when the ignition is switched
off.
You can activate/deactivate this function and
adjust the guide-me-home lighting duration
► With the ignition off, pull the lighting
control stalk toward you ("headlamp flash") to
activate/deactivate the function.
Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off
automatically after a period of time.
Welcome lighting
With the "Automatic headlamp illumination"
function activated, in poor light, the sidelamps
and dipped beam headlamps come on
automatically when the vehicle is unlocked.
Activation, deactivation and the duration of the
exterior welcome lighting are set in the vehicle
configuration menu.
53
Lighting and visibility
Headlamp beam height
adjustment
To avoid dazzling other road users, the height
of the headlamp beams must be adjusted
according to the load in the vehicle.
0
(Initial setting)
Driver only or driver + front passenger
1
5 people
2
5 people + load in the boot
3
Driver only + load in the boot
4 5 6 Not used
This information is provided as a guide only.
Depending on version, the unused positions
may be required.
Automatic lighting
systems - General
recommendations
The automatic lighting systems use a detection
camera, located at the top of the windscreen.
54
Operating limits
The system may be disrupted or not
work correctly:
– When visibility conditions are poor
(e.g. snowfall, heavy rain).
– If the windscreen is dirty, misted-up or
masked (e.g. sticker) in front of the camera.
– If the vehicle is facing highly reflective
signs or safety barrier reflectors.
The system is not able to detect:
– Road users that do not have their own
lighting, such as pedestrians.
– Vehicles with hidden lighting
(e.g. travelling behind a safety barrier on the
motorway).
– Vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep
slope, on winding roads, on crossroads.
Maintenance
Clean the windscreen regularly,
particularly the area in front of the camera.
The internal surface of the windscreen can
also become misted around the camera.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Do not allow snow to accumulate on the
bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could
obstruct the camera.
Automatic headlamp
dipping
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations for
automatic lighting systems.
Available only on versions equipped with Full
LED technology headlamps.
With the ring of the lighting control stalk in the
"AUTO" position and the function activated
on the touch screen, this system automatically
switches between dipped and main beam
headlamps, according to lighting and traffic
conditions, using a camera located at the top of
the windscreen.
Lighting and visibility
This system is a driving aid.
The driver remains responsible for
the vehicle's lighting, its correct use in
the prevailing light, visibility and traffic
conditions, and for compliance with driving
and vehicle regulations.
The system becomes operational
when the vehicle exceeds 16 mph
(25 km/h).
When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h),
the function is no longer operational.
Activation/Deactivation
The settings are changed via the instrument
panel menu, using the steering-mounted
controls.
The state of the system is stored when the
ignition is switched off.
When the system detects thick fog, it
temporarily deactivates the function.
Operation
If the ambient light level is very low and traffic
conditions permit:
– The main beam headlamps
come on automatically. These
indicator lamps light up on the instrument
panel.
If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the
traffic conditions do not allow the main beam
headlamps to be lit:
– The dipped beam headlamps
remain lit. These indicator lamps
light up on the instrument panel.
The function is deactivated if the foglamps
are switched on or if the system detects
poor visibility conditions (e.g. fog, heavy rain,
snowfall).
When the foglamps are switched off or when
the visibility conditions become favourable
again, the function is automatically reactivated.
This indicator lamp goes out when the
function is deactivated.
Pause
If the situation requires a change of headlamp
beam, the driver can take over at any time.
► Switch the headlamps manually between
dipped and main beam to pause the function.
If the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator
lamps were on, the system changes to main
beam.
If the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator lamps
were on, the system changes to dipped beam.
► To reactivate the function, once again
switch the headlamps manually between
dipped and main beam.
up on the instrument panel, accompanied by an
audible signal and a message.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
4
Wiper control stalk
Before operating the wipers in wintry
conditions, clear any snow, ice or frost
from the windscreen and around the wiper
arms and blades.
Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windscreen. In extremely hot or cold
weather, check that the wiper blades are not
stuck to the windscreen before operating
the wipers.
After using an automatic car wash, you
may temporarily notice abnormal
noises and poorer wiping performance. You
do not need to replace the wiper blades.
Malfunction
If a malfunction occurs with the system
or the camera, this warning lamp lights
55
Lighting and visibility
Without AUTO wiping
or
Automatic wiping
Refer to the corresponding section.
Never top up with water.
Rear wiper
Single wipe
► Pull the stalk briefly towards you.
Windscreen wash
With AUTO wiping
► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and
hold.
A final wiping cycle is performed when
screenwashing ends.
The windscreen wash jets are
incorporated into the tip of each wiper
Windscreen wipers
► To select the wiping speed: raise or lower
the stalk to the desired position.
Fast wiping (heavy rain)
The screenwash jets are not
adjustable. Do not handle them (risk of
damage).
Normal wiping (moderate rain)
To avoid damaging the wiper blades,
do not operate the screenwash if the
screenwash reservoir is empty.
Only operate the screenwash if there is no
risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen
and hindering visibility. During the winter
period, use "very cold climate" rated
products.
Intermittent wiping (proportional to the
vehicle’s speed)
Switching off
Single wipe (press down and release).
56
arm.
Screenwash fluid is sprayed along the length
of the wiper blade. This improves visibility
and reduces screenwash fluid consumption.
► Turn the ring to align the desired symbol
with the marking.
Off
Intermittent wiping
Screenwash-wipe
Automatic windscreen
wipers
In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers operate
automatically and adapt to the intensity of the
rainfall.
Detection is via a rain/brightness sensor,
located at the top centre of the windscreen
behind the rear view mirror.
Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor.
When using an automatic car wash,
switch off the automatic wipers and the
ignition.
Lighting and visibility
In winter, wait until the windscreen is
completely clear of ice before activating the
automatic wipers.
Switching on
Malfunction
If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the
wipers operate in intermittent mode.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Special position of the
windscreen wipers
► Give a short downwards push to the control
stalk.
A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has
been accepted.
Depending on version, this indicator
lamp lights up on the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message.
Switching off
► Give the control stalk another brief push
downwards or set the control stalk to another
position (Int, 1 or 2).
Depending on version, this indicator
lamp goes off on the instrument panel,
accompanied by a message.
If the ignition has been off for more
than one minute, the automatic wipers
must be reactivated by pushing the control
stalk downwards.
This maintenance position is used while
cleaning or replacing the wiper blades. It can
also be useful, in wintry weather (ice, snow), to
release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
► Proceed with the desired operation or the
replacement of the wiper blades.
After refitting a windscreen wiper blade
4
► To return the wiper blades to their initial
position after the operation, switch on the
ignition and operate the wiper control stalk.
Changing a wiper blade
Removing/Refitting at the front
To maintain the effectiveness of the
flat wiper blades, it is advisable to:
– handle them with care.
– clean them regularly using soapy water.
– avoid using them to hold cardboard on the
windscreen.
– replace them at the first signs of wear.
Before removing a windscreen wiper blade
Operating the wiper control stalk immediately
after switching off the ignition will place the
wiper blades in a vertical position.
► Carry out these wiper blade replacement
operations from the driver's side.
► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from
you, hold each arm by the rigid section and
raise it as far as possible.
Take care not to hold the arms at the
jet locations.
Do not touch the wiper blades - risk of
irreparable deformation.
57
Lighting and visibility
Do not release them while moving them.
Risk of damaging the windscreen!
► Clean the windscreen using screenwash
fluid.
Do not apply "Rain X" type waterrepellent products.
► Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you
and remove it.
► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm.
► Repeat the procedure for the other wiper
blade.
► Starting with the wiper blade closest to you,
once again hold each arm by the rigid section,
then guide it carefully onto the windscreen.
Removing/refitting at the rear
► Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it
as far as possible.
► Clean the rear screen using screenwash
fluid.
► Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it.
► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the
arm.
► Once again hold the arm by the rigid
section, then guide it carefully onto the rear
screen.
58
Safety
General safety
recommendations
for information on the range of approved
accessories.
Do not remove the labels attached in
different places on your vehicle. They
include safety warnings as well as
identification information for the vehicle.
Depending on country regulations,
certain safety equipment may be
mandatory: high visibility safety vests,
warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs,
spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit,
mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc.
Installing electrical accessories
The fitting of electrical equipment or
accessories not approved by CITROËN may
cause excessive current consumption and
faults and failures with the electrical system
of your vehicle. Contact a CITROËN dealer
without fail contact a CITROËN dealer for
the specification of transmitters which can
be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial
position, specific installation requirements),
in line with the UN ECE Regulation 10.
5
Declarations of conformity for radio
equipment
The relevant certificates are available on the
brand website:
http://service.citroen.com/ACddb/
As a safety measure, access to the
diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's
electronic systems, is reserved strictly for
CITROËN dealers or qualified workshops,
equipped with the special tools required (risk
of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic
systems that could cause breakdowns or
serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot
be held responsible if this advice is not
followed.
Any modification or adaptation not intended
or authorised by CITROËN or carried out
without meeting the technical requirements
defined by the Manufacturer will result in the
suspension of the commercial warranty.
Installation of accessory radio
communication transmitters
Before installing a radio communication
transmitter with an external aerial, you must
Hazard warning lamps
► Pressing this red button causes all the
direction indicators to flash.
They can work with the ignition switched off.
Automatic operation of
hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on
the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning
59
Safety
lamps come on automatically. They switch off
automatically when you next accelerate.
They can be switched off by pressing the
button.
Horn
This function cannot be deactivated.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, this
warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Emergency or assistance
call
► Press the central part of the steering wheel.
Pedestrian horn (Hybrid
or Electric)
This system alerts pedestrians that the vehicle
is approaching (Electric), when driving in allelectric (Hybrid).
The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle
is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph
(30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear.
1. eCall (SOS)
2. ASSISTANCE
eCall (SOS)
Your vehicle may be fitted with the eCall (SOS)
system either as standard or as an option.
The eCall (SOS) system provides direct contact
to the emergency services and is fully built
into the vehicle. This contact is made either
automatically via the sensors built into the
vehicle, or by pressing button 1.
According to the country of sale, the
eCall (SOS) system corresponds to the systems
PE112, ERAGLONASS, 999, etc.
The eCall (SOS) system is activated by default.
► To make an emergency call manually, press
button 1 for more than 2 seconds.
The lit indicator lamp and a voice message
confirm that the call has been made to the
emergency services*.
The eCall (SOS) system immediately locates
your vehicle and puts you in contact with the
appropriate emergency services**.
► Pressing again immediately cancels the
request.
The indicator lamp flashes while the vehicle
data is being sent, and then remains lit when
communication is established.
In the event that a serious accident is
detected by the sensors built into the
vehicle, such as the airbag control unit, an
emergency call is made automatically.
* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations.
** Depending on the geographic coverage provided by the "eCall (SOS)" and "ASSISTANCE" systems.
The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
60
Safety
The eCall (SOS) system is a public
service of general interest and is
free-of-charge.
Operation of the system
– Upon switching on the ignition, the indicator
lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes
out: the system is operating correctly.
– The indicator lamp flashes red: replace the
back-up battery.
– The indicator lamp is fixed red: system
malfunction. The emergency and assistance call
services may not work.
– If the indicator lamp does not come on when
the ignition is switched on, this also means that
there is a system malfunction.
If the problem persists, contact a qualified
workshop as soon as possible.
A system malfunction does not
prevent the vehicle from being driven.
When an onboard system update is
being performed, the eCall (SOS)
function is not available.
Data processing
All processing of personal data by
the eCall (SOS) function complies with
the framework for protection of personal
information established by Regulation
2016/679 (General Data Protection
Regulation - GDPR) or by UK GDPR
(Data Protection, Privacy and Electronic
Communications) Regulations 2019 and
Directive 2002/58/EC of the European
Parliament and the Council, and in particular,
seeks to protect the vital interests of the
data subject, in accordance with Article 6 (1)
d) GDPR.
The processing of personal data is strictly
limited to the purpose of handling the eCall
(SOS) function used with the "112" single
European emergency call number.
The eCall (SOS) function is only able to
collect and process the following data
relating to the vehicle: vehicle identification
number, vehicle type (passenger vehicle or
light commercial vehicle), fuel type or power
source, three most recent locations and
direction of travel, number of passengers
and a timestamped log file of the automatic
activation of the system and its timestamp.
The recipients of the processed data are the
emergency call handling centres designated
by the relevant national authorities in the
territory in which they are located, enabling
priority routing and handling of calls to the
"112" emergency number.
Data storage
Data contained in the system’s
memory is not accessible from outside the
system until a call is made. The system is not
traceable and is not continuously monitored
in its normal operating mode.
The data in the system's internal memory is
automatically and continuously erased. Only
the vehicle’s three most recent locations,
necessary for the normal functioning of the
system, are stored.
When an emergency call is triggered, the
data log is stored for no more than 13 hours.
5
Access to data
You have the right of access to
data and as appropriate to request the
rectification, erasure or restriction of
processing of any personal data not
processed in accordance with the provisions
of GDPR. Third parties to which data has
been disclosed shall be notified of any
rectification, erasure or restriction carried
out in compliance with the corresponding
GDPR, unless it proves impossible or involves
a disproportionate effort.
You also have the right to lodge a complaint
with the respective data protection
supervisory authority.
If you want to claim your above-mentioned
rights please contact us per email at:
[email protected].
For more information regarding our contact
details please take a look at our Privacy &
Cookies Policy on the brand's website.
61
Safety
ASSISTANCE
► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2
for more than 2 seconds to request assistance
(confirmed by a voice message*).
► Pressing again immediately cancels the
request.
Privacy mode allows you to manage
the level of sharing (data and/or
location) between your vehicle and
CITROËN.
It can be configured via the instrument
panel.
If you purchased your vehicle outside
the CITROËN dealer network, you are
invited to have a dealer check the
configuration of these services and, if
desired, modify it as required. In a
multilingual country, services can be
configured to use the official national
language of your choice.
For technical reasons and in particular
to improve the quality of telematics
services provided to customers, the
Manufacturer reserves the right to carry out
updates to the vehicle's on-board telematics
system at any time.
If you benefit from the Citroën
Connect Box offer with the SOS and
Assistance Pack included, there are
additional services available to you in your
personal space, via the website for your
country.
For information about the SOS and
Assistance Pack, please refer to the general
conditions for these services.
Event Data Recording
system
(Depending on country of sale)
This vehicle is fitted with an accident data
recording system, also called Event Data
Recorder (EDR).
This system gathers and records certain vehicle
data over a short period (a few seconds) before,
during and after an event such as an accident
or collision.
In order to gain a better understanding of
the circumstances surrounding the event,
this system records how the vehicle’s various
systems are operating at the time of the event,
including:
– Any deployment of a restraint system
(e.g. airbag, seat belt).
– The status of the seat belts of all the
occupants (fastened/unfastened).
– The contact or intensity of pressure exerted
on the pedal(s) engaged by the driver.
– The speed of the vehicle.
– The status of some driving and manoeuvring
aids systems.
The following are not recorded by the system:
– Data on normal driving conditions, in other
words data not directly related to the event.
– Personal data on the driver and any other
occupants.
– The geographical location of the vehicle at
the time of the event.
The reading of data recorded by the system
requires the following:
– Access to the interior of the vehicle or to the
system.
And
– Special equipment that can be purchased
from the manufacturer BOSCH (www.
BoschCDRTool.com).
Aside from the vehicle Manufacturer, other
parties such as law enforcement agencies may
access this data in order to analyse the event.
* Depending on the geographic coverage of the "eCall (SOS)" and "ASSISTANCE" systems and the official national language chosen by the owner of the
vehicle.
The list of countries covered and the telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
62
Safety
Electronic stability
control (ESC)
The electronic stability control programme
includes the following systems:
– Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic
brake force distribution (EBFD).
– Emergency braking assistance (EBA).
– Anti-slip regulation (ASR).
– Dynamic stability control (DSC).
Anti-lock braking system
(ABS)/Electronic brake force
distribution (EBFD)
These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability
and handling during braking, and enable greater
control while cornering, particularly on poor or
slippery road surfaces.
ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of
emergency braking.
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
manages overall braking pressure on each
individual wheel.
► When braking in an emergency, depress
the pedal very firmly and maintain this
pressure.
Normal operation of the ABS may
make itself felt by slight vibrations of
the brake pedal.
The fixed illumination of this warning
lamp signals that there is a fault with the
ABS.
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive
carefully at a moderate speed.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp, when lit together
with the STOP and ABS warning lamps,
accompanied by a message and an audible
signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction.
You must stop the vehicle.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off
the ignition.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
When changing wheels (tyres and
rims), ensure that these are approved
for your vehicle.
After an impact
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Emergency braking
assistance (EBA)
This system reduces the emergency stopping
distance, by optimising the braking pressure.
It is triggered in relation to the speed at which
the brake pedal is depressed. The effect of this
is a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and
an increase in braking efficiency.
5
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)/
Dynamic stability control
(DSC)
Anti-slip regulation (or traction control)
optimises traction by using engine braking and
by applying the brakes on the driving wheels
to avoid one or more wheels spinning. It also
enhances the vehicle's directional stability.
If there is a difference between the vehicle’s
trajectory and the path desired by the
driver, the dynamic stability control system
automatically uses engine braking and the
brakes on one or more wheels to return the
vehicle to the desired path, within the limits of
the laws of physics.
These systems are activated automatically
every time the vehicle is started.
These systems are activated in the event
of a problem with grip or trajectory
(confirmed by this warning lamp flashing on the
instrument panel).
Deactivation / Reactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle
which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft
ground, etc.), it may be advisable to deactivate
the ASR system, so that the wheels can turn
freely and regain grip.
63
Safety
Reactivate the system as soon as the level of
grip permits.
► Press this button to deactivate / reactivate
the function.
The button indicator lamp is on when the
function is deactivated.
Deactivation is confirmed by the
illumination of this indicator lamp in the
instrument panel and the display of a message.
The ASR system is reactivated automatically
every time the ignition is switched back on or
from 31 mph (50 km/h).
Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h).
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, this
warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel, accompanied by the display
of a message and an audible signal.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
ASR/DSC
These systems enhance safety during
normal driving, but should not encourage
64
the driver to take extra risks or drive at high
speed.
It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow,
ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It is
therefore important for your safety to keep
these systems activated in all conditions,
and particularly in difficult conditions.
Correct operation of these systems depends
on compliance with the manufacturer's
recommendations relating to the wheels
(tyres and rims), braking and electronic
components, as well as the assembly and
repair procedures provided by CITROËN
dealers.
In order to ensure that these systems remain
effective in wintry conditions, the use of
snow or all-season tyres is recommended.
All four wheels must be fitted with tyres
approved for your vehicle.
All tyre specifications are listed on the
tyre/paint label. For more information
on Identification markings, refer to the
corresponding section.
Seat belts
Inertia reel
The seat belts are equipped with an inertia
reel which allows the strap length to adjust
automatically to the shape of the user. The seat
belt returns to its storage automatically when it
is not used.
The inertia reels are fitted with a device which
automatically locks the strap in the event of a
collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle
rolls over. It can be released by pulling the strap
firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in
slightly.
Pyrotechnic pretensioning
This system improves safety in the event of a
frontal or side impact.
Depending on the severity of the impact, the
pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly
tightens the seat belts against the body of the
occupants.
The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are
enabled when the ignition is on.
Force limiting system
This system reduces the pressure of the
seat belt on the chest of the occupant, thus
improving their protection.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and
seriousness of the impacts, the pyrotechnic
device may trigger before and independently
of airbag deployment. Deployment of the
pretensioners is accompanied by a slight
discharge of harmless smoke and a noise,
due to the activation of the pyrotechnic
cartridge incorporated in the system.
In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes
on.
Safety
Following an impact, have the seat belt
system checked, and if necessary replaced,
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Rear seat belts
Seat belt not fastened/
unfastened alerts
5
Front seat belts
Each of the front seats has a three-point seat
belt with inertia reel.
The front seat belts are fitted with a
pyrotechnic pretensioning system and a force
limiting system.
Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat
belt with inertia reel.
The outer seats are fitted with a pyrotechnic
pretensioning and force limiting system.
Fastening
► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue into
the buckle.
► Check that the seat belt is fastened
correctly by pulling on the strap.
Unfastening
► Press the red button on the buckle.
► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in.
1. Front left seat belt warning lamp
2. Front right seat belt warning lamp
3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp
4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp
5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp
If the corresponding seat belt is not fastened
or is unfastened, when the ignition is switched
on, the seat belts warning lamp comes on in
the instrument panel and the corresponding
warning lamp (1 to 5) comes on in red in the
seat belt and front passenger airbag warning
lamps display.
If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the
corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5)
comes on for around 1 minute.
Above about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2
minutes, each warning lamp corresponding to
an occupied seat whose seat belt is unfastened
flashes, accompanied by an audible signal.
65
Safety
After these 2 minutes, the corresponding seat
warning lamp remains on until the driver or the
front/rear passenger fasten their seat belt.
Advice
The driver must ensure that
passengers use the seat belts correctly
and that they are all fastened before setting
off.
Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must
always fasten the seat belt, even for short
journeys.
Do not invert the seat belt buckles, as they
will not fulfil their role properly.
To ensure the proper functioning of the belt
buckles, make sure that there are no foreign
bodies present (e.g. a coin) before fastening.
Before and after use, ensure that the seat
belt is reeled in correctly.
After folding or moving a seat or rear bench
seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned
and reeled in correctly.
Installation
The lower part of the strap must be
positioned as low as possible over the pelvis.
The upper part must be positioned in the
hollow of the shoulder.
At the front, adjusting the position of the
seat belt may require the seat height to be
adjusted.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must:
66
– be tightened as close to the body as
possible.
– be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it is not twisted.
– only be used to secure one person.
– not show signs of tearing or fraying.
– not be changed or modified, in order to
avoid affecting its performance.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the
passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter
than 1.5 metres.
Never use the same seat belt to secure more
than one child.
Never carry a child on your lap.
For more information on Child seats, refer to
the corresponding section.
Maintenance
In accordance with current safety
regulations, for all work on your vehicle's
seat belts, contact a qualified workshop with
the skills and equipment needed, which a
CITROËN dealer is able to provide.
Have the seat belts checked regularly by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop,
particularly if the straps show signs of
damage.
Clean the seat belt straps with soapy
water or a textile cleaning product, sold by
CITROËN dealers.
Airbags
General information
This system is designed to improve the safety
of the occupants of the front seats and the rear
outer seats in the event of a violent collision.
The airbags supplement the action of the seat
belts equipped with a force limiting system.
Electronic detectors record and analyse the
front and side impacts sustained in the impact
detection zones:
– In the event of violent impact, the airbags
deploy instantly and help better protect the
occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the
impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not
to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the
occupants.
– In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact
and under certain rollover conditions, the
airbags may not deploy; only the seat belt helps
to protect you in these situations.
The seriousness of the impact depends on the
nature of the obstacle and the speed of the
vehicle at the moment of collision.
The airbags do not operate when the
ignition is switched off.
This equipment will only deploy once. If a
second impact occurs (during the same or a
subsequent accident), the airbag will not be
deployed again.
Safety
Impact detection zones
Front airbags
Lateral airbags
This system protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious side impact,
limiting the risk of injury to the chest, between
the hip and the shoulder.
Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest
frame, on the door side.
Deployment
A. Front impact zone
B. Side impact zone
When one or more airbags are
deployed, the detonation of the
pyrotechnic charge incorporated in the
system makes a noise and releases a small
quantity of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive
individuals may experience irritation.
The detonation noise associated with the
deployment of one or more airbags may
result in a slight loss of hearing for a short
time.
5
This system protects the driver and front
passenger in the event of a serious front
impact, limiting the risk of head and chest
injury.
The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the
steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is
fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
Deployment
They are deployed, except for the front
passenger airbag if it is deactivated*, in the
event of a violent front impact applied to all or
part of front impact zone A.
The front airbag inflates between the chest and
head of the front occupant of the vehicle and
the steering wheel, on the driver's side, and the
dashboard, on the passenger's side, to cushion
their forward movement.
The lateral airbags are deployed on one side in
the event of a serious side impact applied to all
or part of the side impact zone B.
The lateral airbag inflates between the chest of
the vehicle's occupant and the corresponding
door panel.
Curtain airbags
This system helps provide greater protection for
the driver and passengers (with the exception
of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a
serious side impact, in order to limit the risk of
injury to the side of the head.
Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and
the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
It deploys simultaneously with the
corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a
serious side impact applied to all or part of the
side impact zone B.
* For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.
67
Safety
The curtain airbag inflates between the front
and rear occupants of the vehicle and the
corresponding windows.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction,
these warning lamps light up on
the instrument panel. Contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop to have the
system checked.
The airbags may not be deployed in the event
of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or
bump at the side of the vehicle or if
the vehicle rolls over, the airbags may not be
deployed.
In the event of a rear or front collision, none
of the lateral airbags are deployed.
Advice
For the airbags to be fully effective,
observe the safety recommendations
below.
Adopt a normal and upright sitting position.
Fasten your seat belt and position it
correctly.
Do not place anything between the
occupants and the airbags (e.g. child, animal,
object), do not fix or attach anything near or
in the path of the airbags, as this could cause
injuries when they are deployed.
68
Never modify the original definition of the
vehicle, particularly in the area directly
around the airbags.
Even if all of the precautions mentioned
are observed, a risk of injury or of minor
burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be
ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The
bag inflates almost instantly (within a few
milliseconds) then deflates within the same
time, discharging the hot gas via openings
provided for this purpose.
After an accident or if the vehicle has been
stolen, have the airbag systems checked.
All work must be carried out only by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering
wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on
the centre part of the wheel.
Passengers must not place their feet on the
dashboard.
Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags
can cause burns or the risk of injury from a
cigarette or pipe.
Never remove or pierce the steering wheel
or hit it violently.
Do not fix or attach anything to the steering
wheel or dashboard, as this could cause
injuries when the airbags are deployed.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved seat covers
compatible with the deployment of these
airbags. For information on the range of seat
covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a
CITROËN dealer.
Do not fix or attach anything to the seat
backrests (e.g. clothing) as this could cause
injuries to the chest or arm when the airbag
is deployed.
Do not sit with the upper part of the body
any nearer to the door than necessary.
The vehicle's front door panels include side
impact sensors.
A damaged door or any unauthorised or
incorrectly executed work (modification or
repair) on the front doors or their interior
trim could compromise the operation of
these sensors - risk of malfunction of the
lateral airbags!
All work must be carried out only by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the
roof, as this could cause head injuries when
the curtain airbag is deployed.
Do not remove the grab handles installed on
the roof, as these help to secure the curtain
airbags.
Safety
Child seats
The regulations on carrying children
are specific to each country. Refer to
the legislation in force in your country.
For maximum safety, please observe the
following recommendations:
– In accordance with European regulations, all
children under the age of 12 or less than 1.5
metres tall must travel in approved child seats
suited to their size or weight, on seats fitted
with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings.
– Statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle
for carrying children are the rear seats.
– Children ageing less than 15 months must
travel in the "rearward facing" position,
whether in the front or rear of the vehicle.
It is recommended that children travel
on the rear seats of the vehicle:
– "rearward facing" up to the age of 3.
– "forward facing" over the age of 3.
Make sure that the seat belt is
correctly positioned and tightened.
For child seats with a support leg, ensure
that the support leg is in firm and steady
contact with the floor.
An incorrectly installed child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's safety
in the event of an accident.
Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt
buckle under the child seat, as this could
destabilise it.
Remember to fasten the seat belts or the
child seat harness keeping the slack relative
to the child's body to a minimum, even for
short journeys.
When installing a child seat using the seat
belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened
correctly on the child seat and that it
secures the child seat firmly on the vehicle
seat.
Remove the head restraint before installing
a child seat with a backrest on a passenger
seat.
Ensure that the head restraint is stored or
attached securely to prevent it from being
thrown around the vehicle in the event of
sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once
the child seat has been removed.
Installing a booster seat
The chest part of the seat belt must
be positioned on the child's shoulder
without touching the neck.
Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt
passes correctly over the child's thighs.
Use a booster seat with a backrest, equipped
with a belt guide at shoulder level.
Additional protections
To prevent accidental opening of the
doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock".
Take care not to open the rear windows by
more than one third.
To protect young children from the sun's
rays, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
As a safety measure, do not leave:
– A child alone and unsupervised inside a
vehicle.
– A child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows
closed.
– The keys within reach of children inside
the vehicle.
5
Child seat at the rear
Forward-facing or rearward-facing
► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and
straighten the backrest so that the legs of the
child in the forward-facing or rearward-facing
69
Safety
child seat itself do not touch the vehicle's front
seat.
► Check that the backrest of the forwardfacing child seat is as close as possible to the
backrest of the vehicle's rear seat, and ideally in
contact with it.
Rearward-facing
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint
on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the
CHILD can occur.
Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be
installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
Child seat at the front
The front passenger airbag must be
deactivated before installing a
rearward-facing child seat. Otherwise, the
child risks being seriously injured or killed
if the airbag is deployed.
Forward-facing
Warning label - Front passenger airbag
70
Deactivating the front
passenger airbag
Passenger airbag OFF
► Adjust the front passenger seat to the
maximum rear longitudinal position, with the
backrest straightened.
You must leave the front passenger
airbag active.
You must comply with the following instruction,
as reminded by the warning label on both sides
of the passenger sun visor:
To ensure the safety of the child, the
front passenger airbag MUST be
deactivated when a "rearward facing" child
seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
Otherwise, the child risks being seriously
injured or killed in the event of deployment
of the airbag.
Vehicles not equipped with a
deactivation/reactivation control
Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on
the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited
- risk of death or serious injury in the event of
airbag deployment!
Safety
Deactivating/Reactivating the front
passenger airbag
For vehicles on which it is fitted, the switch is
located on the side of the dashboard.
"ISOFIX" mountings
The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX
compliant mountings:
The mountings comprise three rings for each
seat, indicated by a marking:
– Two rings A, located between the vehicle
seat backrest and cushion.
With the ignition off:
► To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the
switch to the "OFF" position.
► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON"
position.
When the ignition is switched on:
This warning lamp comes on and remains
lit to signal deactivation.
Or
This warning lamp comes on and remains
lit to signal activation.
The 2 latches on ISOFIX child seats are secured
to them.
– One ring B, located behind the seat, called
the TOP TETHER, for attaching seats fitted
with an upper strap.
5
*Depending on country of sale.
This system prevents the child seat from
tipping forwards in the event of a front impact.
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast,
reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the
vehicle.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER:
► Remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on this seat (refit it
once the child seat has been removed).
► Pass the strap of the child seat behind the
seat backrest, centring it between the openings
for the head restraint rods.
► Secure the upper strap hook to ring B.
► Tighten the upper strap.
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to
the left-hand rear seat of the bench
seat, before fitting the seat, first move the
centre rear seat belt towards the middle of
the vehicle, so as to avoid the seat
interfering with the operation of the seat
belt.
71
Safety
An incorrectly installed child seat in a
vehicle compromises the child's safety
in the event of an accident.
Strictly observe the fitting instructions
provided in the user guide supplied with the
child seat.
Recommended child
seats
"RÖMER Baby-Safe 3 i-Size"
Size: 40 - 83 cm
For information about the options for
fitting ISOFIX child seats in your
vehicle, refer to the summary table.
i-Size child seats
i-Size child seats have two latches that are
anchored to the two rings A.
These i-Size child seats also have:
– either an upper strap that is attached to ring
B.
– or a support leg that rests on the vehicle
floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat
position.
Their role is to prevent the child seat from
tipping forward in the event of a collision.
For more information on the ISOFIX
mountings, refer to the corresponding section.
72
"RÖMER KidFix i-Size"
Size: 100 - 150 cm
From birth to 15 months
(up to 13 kg)
With or without its ISOFIX base.
Suitable for "rearward facing" installation
only.
"RÖMER TriFix 2 i-Size"
Size: 76 - 105 cm
From 3.5 to 12 years
(from 15 to 36 kg)
Can be installed with or without ISOFIX
mountings.
The child is restrained by the seat belt.
Bought in Stellantis & You, Sales and
Services
We recommend using child seat with the
backrest. If the backrest is removed for
child over 138 cm, the secure guard must
also be removed.
Please follow the child restraint
manufacturers' instructions for
installing the appropriate child restraint in
the vehicle.
From 15 months to 4 years
(from 9 to 22 kg)
Installed with ISOFIX and Top Tether
mountings.
Suitable for "forward facing" installation only.
For the semi-universal or vehiclespecific child restraint (ISOFIX or
belt-type child restraint), refer to the list of
vehicles provided in the child restraint user
manual.
Safety
Ensure that the installation location of
the child restraint system inside the
vehicle is correct.
Refer to the summary table for the
installation of child seats.
5
Summary table for installation of universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child seats
In compliance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved
(a) as well as the largest ISOFIX and i-Size child seats on seat positions equipped with ISOFIX mountings in the vehicle.
Seat numbers
Front seats (b)
Rear seats (b)
1
3
4
5
6
3
1
4
5
6
Front passenger airbag
Deactivated "OFF"
(c)
Activated "ON" (d)
Position compatible with a universal (a)
child seat
Rearward facing
no
yes (e) (g)
no
yes
yes (h)
yes
Position compatible with a universal (a)
child seat
Forward facing
no
yes (f) (g)
yes (f) (g)
yes
yes (h)
yes
73
Safety
Seat numbers
Front seats (b)
1
3
4
5
6
3
1
4
5
6
Front passenger airbag
74
Rear seats (b)
Activated "ON" (d)
Deactivated "OFF"
(c)
Position compatible with an i-Size child
seat
Rearward facing
no
no
yes
no
yes
Position compatible with an i-Size child
seat
Forward facing
no
no
yes
no
yes
Position equipped with a Top Tether hook
no
no
yes
no
yes
"Carrycot" type of child seat
(L1 / L2)
no
no
no
no
no
"Rearward facing" ISOFIX child seat
(R1 / R2 / R3)
no
no
R3
no
R3
"Forward facing" ISOFIX child seat
(F2 / F2X / F3)
no
no
F3
no
F3
"Booster" child seat
(B2 / B3)
no
B3
B3
no
B3
Safety
Rules:
– A position that is i-Size compatible is also
compatible for R1, R2 and F2X, F2, B2.
– A position that is R3 compatible is also
compatible for R1 and R2.
– A position that is R2 compatible is also
compatible for R1.
– A position that is F3 compatible is also
compatible for F2X and F2.
– A position that is B3 compatible is also
compatible for B2.
(f) For a "forward facing" universal child seat
(UF) in groups 1, 2 or 3 or dedicated to
children between 76 and 150 cm in size
only.
5
(g) The vehicle seat must be adjusted in the
rearmost longitudinal position.
(h) A child seat with a support leg must never
be installed on the centre rear passenger
seat.
(a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be
installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b) Depending on version, refer to the
legislation in force in your country before
installing a child in this seat position.
(c) To install a "rearward facing" child seat
at this seat position, the front passenger's
airbag MUST be deactivated ("OFF").
(d) Only a "forward facing" child seat is
authorised at this seat position with the
front passenger's airbag activated ("ON").
(e) For a "rearward facing" and/or "forward
facing" universal child seat (U) in groups
0, 0+, 1, 2 or 3 or dedicated to children
between 40 and 150 cm in size.
Key
Seat position where the installation of a
child seat is forbidden.
Front passenger airbag
deactivated and associated
warning lamp.
Front passenger airbag activated
and associated warning lamp.
75
Safety
Seat position suitable for the installation
of a child seat secured using the seat
belt and universally approved "rearward
facing" and/or "forward facing" (U) for groups
0, 0+, 1, 2 or 3, or dedicated to children
between 40 and 150 cm in size.
Seat position suitable for the installation
of a child seat secured using the seat
belt and universally approved "forward
facing" (UF) for groups 1, 2 or 3, or dedicated to
children between 76 and 150 cm in size only.
Seat position authorised for the
installation of an i-Size child seat.
Seat position not suitable for the
installation of a child seat with support
leg.
Seat position authorised for the
installation of a "forward facing" i-Size
child seat.
Presence of a Top Tether anchorage
point at the rear of the backrest,
authorising the installation of an universal
ISOFIX child seat.
Presence of a Top Tether anchorage
point at the rear of the backrest,
authorising the installation of a "forward
facing" universal ISOFIX child seat.
"Rearward facing" ISOFIX child seat:
– R1: ISOFIX child seat for a baby.
– R2: ISOFIX reduced size child seat.
– R3: ISOFIX large size child seat.
76
"Forward facing" ISOFIX child seat:
– F2X: ISOFIX child seat for toddlers.
– F2: ISOFIX reduced height child seat.
– F3: ISOFIX full height child seat.
Booster child seat, using seat belt or
ISOFIX mountings:
– B2: reduced width booster seat.
– B3: full width booster seat.
ISOFIX "carrycot" type child seat:
– L1: left-hand facing.
– L2: right-hand facing.
For seat adjustments, refer to the summary
table "Installing universal, ISOFIX and i-Size
child seats".
Manual child lock
The system prevents a rear door from being
opened using its interior handle.
The red control is located on the edge of each
rear door (marked by a label).
Activation/Deactivation
► To activate the child lock, turn the built-in
key in the red control as far as possible:
• To the right on the left-hand rear door.
• To the left on the right-hand rear door.
► To deactivate the child lock, turn the key in
the opposite direction.
Do not confuse the child lock control,
which is red, with the back-up locking
control, which is black.
Driving
Driving
recommendations
► Observe the driving regulations and remain
vigilant whatever the traffic conditions.
► Monitor your environment and keep your
hands on the wheel to be able to react to
anything that may happen any time.
► Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for
braking and maintain a longer safety distance,
especially in bad weather.
► Stop the vehicle before performing
operations that require sustained attention
(e.g. settings).
► During long trips, take a break every 2 hours.
Important!
Never leave the engine running in a
closed space without sufficient
ventilation. Internal combustion engines
emit toxic exhaust gases such as carbon
monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death!
In very severe wintry conditions
(temperature below -23°C), let the
engine run for 4 minutes before moving off,
to ensure the correct operation and
durability of the mechanical components of
your vehicle (engine and gearbox).
Never drive with the parking brake
applied. Risk of overheating and
damaging the braking system!
Never park the vehicle and never
leave the engine running on a
flammable surface (e.g. dry grass, dead
leaves). The vehicle exhaust system is very
hot, even several minutes after the engine
stops. Risk of fire!
Never drive on surfaces covered with
vegetation (e.g. tall grass,
accumulated dead leaves, crops, debris)
such as a field, a country lane overgrown
with bushes or a grassy verge.
This vegetation could come into contact
with the vehicle's exhaust system or other
systems which are very hot. Risk of fire!
Make sure you do not leave any item in
the passenger compartment which
could act like a magnifying glass under the
effect of the sun's rays and cause a fire. Risk
of fire or damage to interior surfaces!
Never leave the vehicle unattended,
with the engine running. If you have
to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, apply the parking brake and put the
gearbox or drive selector into neutral or
position N or P (depending on version).
Never leave children inside the
vehicle unsupervised.
6
On flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded
roads, as this could cause serious damage
to the engine or gearbox, as well as to your
vehicle's electrical systems.
If the vehicle absolutely must drive through a
flooded section of road:
► Check that the depth of the water does not
exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that
might be generated by other users.
► Deactivate the Stop & Start function.
► Drive as slowly as possible without stalling.
In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h).
► Do not stop and do not switch off the
engine.
On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety
conditions allow, make several light brake
applications to dry the brake discs and pads.
If in doubt about the state of your vehicle,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
77
Driving
Noise (Electric)
On the outside
Due to the vehicle’s quiet operation when
driving, the driver must pay particular attention.
When manoeuvring, the driver must always
check the vehicle's immediate surroundings.
At speeds of up to 19 mph (30 km/h), the
pedestrian horn warns other road users of the
vehicle’s presence.
Cooling the traction battery
The cooling fan comes on during
charging to cool the on-board charger and
the traction battery.
On the inside
During use, you may hear certain perfectly
normal noises specific to electric vehicles, such
as:
– Traction battery relay when starting.
– Vacuum pump when braking.
– Vehicle tyres or aerodynamics when driving.
– Jolting and knocking noise during hill starts.
Towing
Driving with a trailer places greater
demands on the towing vehicle and
particular care must be taken.
Do not exceed the maximum towable
weights.
At altitude: reduce the maximum load by
10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower
air density at high altitudes decreases engine
performance.
New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until
the vehicle has driven at least 620
miles (1,000 kilometres).
If the outside temperature is high, let
the engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after
the vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to
cool.
Before setting off
Nose weight
► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
heaviest items are located as close as possible
to the axle, and the nose weight (at the point
where it joins your vehicle) approaches the
maximum permitted, without exceeding it.
Tyres
► Check the tyre pressures of the towing
vehicle and of the trailer, observing the
recommended pressures.
Lighting
► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer
and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle.
78
If a genuine CITROËN towing device is
used, the rear parking sensors will be
deactivated automatically to avoid activating
the audible signal.
When driving
Cooling
Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant
temperature to increase. The maximum towable
load depends on the gradient and the exterior
temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does
not increase with engine speed.
► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed
to limit the amount of heating produced.
► Pay constant attention to the coolant
temperature.
If this warning lamp and the
STOP warning lamp come on,
stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as
soon as possible.
Brakes
Using the engine brake is recommended to
limit the overheating of the brakes. Braking
distances are increased when towing a trailer.
Side wind
Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more
susceptible to wind when towing.
Driving
Anti-theft protection
Electronic immobiliser
3. Ignition
Steering column unlocked, ignition on,
engine running.
The keys contain a code, which must be
recognised by the vehicle before starting is
possible.
If the system malfunctions, indicated by the
display of a message, the engine will not start.
Contact a CITROËN dealer.
4. Starting
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the
key or the remote control. It would
weigh down on its shaft in the ignition
switch and could cause a malfunction.
Starting/Switching off
the engine
Ignition on position
Key ignition switch
It allows the use of the vehicle's electric
equipment or the charging of accessories.
Once the state of charge of the battery drops
to the reserve level, the system switches to
energy economy mode. The power supply is
cut off automatically to preserve the remaining
battery charge.
Starting the engine
It has 4 positions:
1. Stop
Inserting and removing the key, steering
column locked.
2. Accessories
Steering column unlocked, use of the
vehicle's electric equipment.
With the parking brake applied:
► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.
► With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
selector in mode N or P then depress the brake
pedal.
► Insert the key into the ignition switch; the
system recognises the code.
► Unlock the steering column by
simultaneously turning the steering wheel and
the key.
In certain cases, you may need to
apply significant force to move the
steering wheel (e.g. wheels turned to full
lock).
6
► With a petrol engine, operate the starter
motor by turning the key to position 4 without
pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine
starts. Once the engine has started, release the
key and allow it to return to position 3.
Petrol engines
After a cold start, preheating the
catalytic converter can cause noticeable
engine vibrations, for anything up to
2 minutes (accelerated idle speed).
Hybrid engines
The vehicle always starts with the
petrol engine to ensure the efficiency of the
catalytic converter and the availability of the
brake assist.
After a few moments, the petrol engine may
stop if the operating conditions allow (state
of charge of the traction battery, external
temperature, torque demand, selected
driving mode).
In mild conditions, do not leave the
engine to warm up while stationary,
but move off straight away and drive at
moderate speed.
79
Driving
If the engine does not start straight
away, switch off the ignition. Wait a
few seconds before operating the starter
motor again. If the engine does not start
after a few attempts, do not keep trying - risk
of damaging the starter motor and the
engine!
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Switching off the engine
► Immobilise the vehicle.
► With the engine at idle, turn the key to
position 2.
► Insert the key one notch into the ignition
switch and turn it to position 1, then remove
the key from the ignition switch.
► To lock the steering column, turn the
steering wheel until it locks.
To facilitate unlocking of the steering
column, it is recommended that the
wheels be returned to the straight ahead
position before switching off the engine.
Never switch off the ignition before
the complete immobilisation of the
vehicle. With the engine off, the braking and
steering assistance systems are also cut off
- risk of loss of control of the vehicle!
Check that the parking brake is
correctly applied, particularly on
sloping ground.
When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in
your possession and lock the vehicle.
Starting/Switching off
electric vehicles
Starting
The drive selector must be in mode P.
► If using a conventional or remote control
key, depress the brake pedal and turn the key
to position 4 until the motor starts, without
depressing the accelerator. As soon as the
motor starts, release the key so it returns to
position 3.
► Keep your foot on the brake pedal until the
READY indicator lamp comes on and an audible
signal is emitted, indicating that the vehicle is
ready to drive.
► With your foot on the brake, select mode D
or R.
► Release the brake pedal, then accelerate.
On starting, the instrument panel lights up
and the power indicator cursor moves to
the "neutral" position. The steering column
automatically unlocks (you may hear a sound
and feel the steering wheel move).
Switching off
► If using a conventional or remote control
key, turn the key fully to position 1 (Stop).
80
Before exiting the vehicle, check that:
– The drive selector is in mode P.
– The READY indicator lamp is off.
If the driver's door is opened while the
required conditions for switching off
are not met, an audible signal is emitted,
accompanied by the display of a warning
message.
Energy economy mode
After the engine has stopped (position 1.
Stop), for a maximum combined duration of 30
minutes, you can still use functions such as the
audio and telematics system, courtesy lamps or
dipped beam headlamps.
For more information on Energy
economy mode, refer to the
corresponding section.
Key left in
When the driver's door is opened, a
message is displayed, accompanied by an
audible signal, if the key has been left in the
ignition switch in position 1 (Stop).
If the key has been left in the ignition switch
in position 3, the ignition will be switched off
automatically after one hour.
To switch the ignition back on, turn the key
to position 1, then back to position 3.
Driving
Manual parking brake
Electric parking brake
Release
In automatic mode, this system applies the
parking brake when the engine is switched off
and releases it when the vehicle moves off.
► Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press
the release button, then lower the lever fully.
When driving the vehicle, if this warning
lamp and the STOP warning lamp come
on, accompanied by an audible signal and the
display of a message, this means that the
parking brake is still applied or has not been
fully released.
Application
At any time, with the engine running:
► To apply the parking brake, briefly pull the
control.
► To release it, briefly push the control while
pressing the brake pedal.
Automatic mode is activated by default.
This automatic operation can be deactivated in
certain situations.
► Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise
the vehicle.
Indicator lamp
When parking on a slope, turn the
wheels against the kerb, apply the
parking brake, engage a gear and switch off
the ignition.
This indicator lamp comes on both on
the instrument panel and on the control
to confirm that the parking brake has been
applied, accompanied by display of the
message "Parking brake applied".
The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the
release of the parking brake, accompanied by
the display of the message "Parking brake
released".
The indicator lamp flashes in response to a
manual request to apply or release the brake.
6
In the event of a battery failure, the
electric parking brake will not operate.
As a safety measure, with an automatic
gearbox or drive selector, if the parking brake
is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by
placing the supplied chock against one of
the wheels.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that
the parking brake is applied: the
parking brake indicator lamps on the
instrument panel and the control must be on
fixed.
If the parking brake is not applied, there is an
audible signal and a message is displayed on
opening the driver's door.
Never leave a child alone inside the
vehicle, as they could release the
parking brake.
81
Driving
When the vehicle is parked: on a
steep slope, heavily loaded or during
towing
With an automatic gearbox or a drive
selector, turn the wheels toward the
pavement and select mode P.
When towing, the vehicle is approved for
parking on slopes of up to 12%.
When the vehicle is parked on a slope,
the electric parking brake must be applied
before engaging mode P of the automatic
gearbox.
Manual operation
Manual release
With the ignition on or engine running:
► Press the brake pedal.
► While maintaining pressure on the brake
pedal, briefly push the control.
If the brake pedal is not depressed, the
parking brake is not released and a
message is displayed.
Manual application
With the vehicle stationary:
► Briefly pull the control.
The control indicator lamp flashes to confirm
the application request.
82
Automatic operation
Automatic release
First ensure that the engine is running and that
the driver's door is closed.
The electric parking brake gradually releases
automatically as the vehicle moves off.
With an automatic gearbox
► Depress the brake pedal.
► Select mode D, L or R.
► Release the brake pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal.
With a drive selector
► Depress the brake pedal.
► Select mode D, C or R.
► Release the brake pedal and depress the
accelerator pedal.
With an automatic gearbox or drive
selector, if the brake does not release
automatically, check that the front doors are
properly closed.
When stationary with the engine
running, do not depress the
accelerator pedal unnecessarily. Risk of
parking brake release.
Automatic application
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake
is applied automatically when the engine is
switched off.
It is not applied automatically if the
engine stalls or enters STOP mode
with Stop & Start.
In automatic mode, the parking brake
can be manually applied or released at
any time using the control.
Special cases
Immobilising the vehicle with the
engine running
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine
running, briefly pull the control.
Parking the vehicle with the brake
released
In very cold conditions (ice), applying
the parking brake is not
recommended.
To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or
place the chocks against one of the wheels.
With an automatic gearbox or drive
selector, mode P is automatically
selected when the ignition is switched off.
The wheels are blocked.
For more information on Free-wheeling,
refer to the corresponding section.
Driving
With an automatic gearbox or a drive
selector, if you open the driver's door
while mode N is engaged, an audible signal
will sound and mode P will be engaged. The
audible signal stops when the driver's door is
closed.
Deactivating automatic
operation
In some situations, for example when it is
extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan,
breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate
automatic operation of the system.
► Start the engine.
► Use the control to apply the parking brake, if
it is released.
► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal.
► Push the control for 10 to a maximum of
15 seconds.
► Release the control.
► Depress and hold the brake pedal.
► Pull the control for 2 seconds.
This indicator lamp on the instrument
panel comes on to confirm deactivation
of the automatic functions.
► Release the control and the brake pedal.
From this point onwards, only the manual
functions, using the control, allow the parking
brake to be applied and released.
► Follow this procedure again to reactivate
automatic operation (confirmed by the
indicator lamp on the instrument panel going
out).
Emergency braking
If depressing the brake pedal fails to
provide effective braking or in exceptional
circumstances (e.g. driver unwell, assisted
driving), the vehicle can be braked by sustained
pulling on the electric parking brake control.
Braking continues for as long as the control
is kept pulled, and ceases when the control is
released.
The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle
during emergency braking.
If emergency braking malfunctions, the
message "Parking brake fault" will be displayed
on the instrument panel.
If the ABS and DSC systems
malfunction, indicated by lighting
one or both warning lamps on the instrument
panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer
ensured.
► In this case, ensure the vehicle's stability by
successive and repeated "pull-release" actions
on the electric parking brake control until the
vehicle comes to a complete stop.
6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging reverse gear
6
► Raise the ring under the knob and move the
gear selector to the left, then forwards.
idle.
Only engage reverse gear when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine at
As a safety precaution and to facilitate
engine starting:
► Always select neutral.
► Press the clutch pedal.
Automatic gearbox
(EAT6)
6-speed automatic gearbox which offers a
choice between the comfort of automatic
operation or manual gear changing.
Two driving modes are available:
83
Driving
– Automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox.
– Manual operation for sequential changing of
the gears by the driver.
Gear selector module
M. +/- Manual operation
► To shift up/down through the gears,
push the control backwards/forwards.
Information displayed on
the instrument panel
When a position is selected in the grid with the
gear selector, the corresponding indicator lamp
lights up on the instrument panel.
P.
R.
N.
D.
84
Park
– Vehicle immobilised, parking brake
applied or released.
– Engine starting.
Reverse
– Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle
stationary, engine at idle.
Neutral
– Vehicle immobilised, parking brake
applied.
– Engine starting.
Automatic operation
P.
Park
R.
Reverse
N.
Neutral
D.
Drive (automatic operation)
M1...6.
Gear engaged during manual
operation
-.
Instruction not accepted during
manual operation
Foot on the brake
► Depress the brake pedal when this
warning lamp is displayed on the
instrument panel (e.g. when starting the
engine).
Starting the vehicle
► Apply the parking brake.
► With your foot on the brake pedal,
select position P or N.
► Start the engine.
If the conditions are not met, you will hear an
audible signal, accompanied by the display of a
message.
► With the engine running, depress the brake
pedal.
► Release the parking brake.
► Select position R, D or M.
► Gradually release the brake pedal.
The vehicle moves off immediately.
If position N is selected inadvertently
while driving, allow the engine to
return to idle, then select position D to
accelerate.
When the engine is running at idle
with the brakes released, if position R,
D or M is selected, the vehicle moves off
even without the accelerator being pressed.
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle when the engine is running.
When carrying out maintenance with the
engine running, apply the parking brake and
select position P.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing the
vehicle.
Driving
Automatic operation
► Select position D for automatic changing of
the six gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive
mode, without any intervention on the part
of the driver. It continuously selects the most
suitable gear according to the driving style, the
road profile and the load in the vehicle.
For maximum acceleration without touching
the selector, press the accelerator fully down
(kick-down). The gearbox changes down
automatically or holds the gear selected until
the maximum engine speed is reached.
When braking, the gearbox changes down
automatically to provide effective engine
braking.
If you release the accelerator sharply, the
gearbox will not shift to a higher gear for safety
reasons.
Never select position N while the
vehicle is moving.
Never select positions P or R unless the
vehicle is completely stationary.
Manual operation
To limit fuel consumption during an
extended standstill with the engine
running (e.g. in a traffic jam), set the gear
selector to position N and apply the parking
brake.
► Selecting position M enables sequential
shifting between the six gears.
► To shift up/down through the gears, push
the control backwards/forwards.
The gearbox only changes gear if the vehicle
speed and engine speed conditions allow;
otherwise, the rules for automatic operation are
temporarily applied.
D disappears, and the gears engaged appear in
succession on the instrument panel.
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the
selected gear flashes for a few seconds, then
the gear actually engaged is shown.
It is possible to change from position D to
position M at any time.
When the vehicle is stationary or moving
very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1
automatically.
This symbol is displayed if a gear is not
engaged correctly (gear selector
between two positions).
Switching off the vehicle
Before switching off the engine, it is possible
to engage position P or N to place the gearbox
in neutral.
In both cases, apply the parking brake to
immobilise the vehicle.
is switched off, an audible signal sounds and
a message appears.
► Return the gear selector to position P;
the audible signal stops and the message
disappears.
6
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, this
warning lamp comes on accompanied by
an audible signal and a message is displayed,
when the ignition is switched on.
In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up
mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a
significant jolt (without risk to the gearbox)
when changing from P to R and from N to R.
Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed
restrictions permitting.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
There is a risk of damaging the
gearbox:
– If the accelerator and brake pedals are
depressed simultaneously.
– In the event of a battery failure, forcing
the selector from position P to another
position.
If the gear selector is not in position P,
when the driver's door is opened or
approximately 45 seconds after the ignition
85
Driving
Electric dual-clutch
automatic gearbox
(e-DCS6)
6-speed electrified dual-clutch automatic
gearbox with push selector for hybrid vehicles.
It also offers a manual mode with gear changes
via control paddles located behind the steering
wheel.
It includes the 48 V electric motor, which
improves the performance of the petrol
engine, reduces fuel consumption and drives in
all-electric.
Push selector
N. Neutral
To free-wheel and move the vehicle, with the
ignition off.
For more information on Free-wheeling,
refer to the corresponding section.
D. Driving in automatic mode
The gearbox manages gear changes
according to the style of driving, the road
profile and the vehicle load.
The gearbox also manages braking when the
accelerator pedal is released.
L. Driving in low mode
Press this button to switch to low mode.
Drive slowly with more power. Engine power
is higher and speed is slower.
► In mode N, with your foot on the brake
pedal, push without passing the point of
resistance:
• Forwards, mode R is selected.
• Backwards, mode D is selected.
Release the selector fully after each push; it
will then return to its initial position.
Special cases
P. Auto Park
Press this button to switch to Parking mode.
For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are
blocked.
R. Reverse
86
To avoid mode N (quick change from D to R and
back again):
► In mode R, push backwards past the point of
resistance, mode D is selected.
► In mode D, push forwards past the point of
resistance, mode R is selected.
► To return to mode N, push without passing
the point of resistance.
Electric motor
The electric motor included in the automatic
gearbox, which is used for the first start,
provides 12 V power supply via the DC/DC
converter and provides electric assistance to
the petrol engine.
The electric motor has the following features:
– Provide an additional torque to the gearbox,
optimising the performance of the petrol
engine.
– Recover the kinetic energy of the
deceleration phases, converting it into electrical
energy, which can be used for traction or for the
power supply of electrical accessories installed
on the vehicle.
– Recharge the 48 V traction battery when the
state of charge is too low.
– Provide all-electric driving only.
These features are achieved through the
following functions set of automatic operating
mode:
– e-Boost.
– e-Creeping.
– e-Launch.
– e-Queueing.
– e-Parking.
A manual operating mode is also available to
activate/deactivate the restart of the petrol
engine while driving: the e-Auto mode.
When mode P or N is selected on the
automatic gearbox, the noise level in
the engine compartment may increase due
Driving
to the start of the charging phase of the
traction battery: this is normal and does not
represent a malfunction.
Information displayed on
the instrument panel
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox
status is displayed on the instrument panel:
P
Parking
R
Reverse
N
Neutral
D
Automatic forward gear
L1...6
Low forward gear
However, in all-electric driving, the gear
engaged is not indicated.
The state of the gearbox remains displayed on
the instrument panel for a few seconds after
switching off the ignition.
Operation
Only appropriate mode change instructions are
validated.
With the engine running, if it is necessary to
depress the brake pedal to change modes,
an alert message will be displayed on the
instrument panel.
With the engine running and the
brakes released, if R, D or L is selected,
the vehicle moves off, even without pressing
the accelerator pedal.
Never depress the accelerator and brake
pedals at the same time - risk of damage to
the gearbox!
If you open the driver's door while
mode N is engaged, an audible signal
will sound and mode P will be engaged. The
audible signal stops when the driver's door is
closed.
At speeds below 3 mph (5 km/h),
opening the driver’s door will engage
mode P - risk of sudden braking!
e-Launch
With the petrol engine off, this function allows
the vehicle to run in electric mode without
affecting performance.
By depressing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle
starts to drive as soon as the mode D or R of
the automatic gearbox is selected.
e-Creeping
With the petrol engine off, by releasing the
brake pedal, this function allows the vehicle to
be moved forward or backward in electric mode
without having to depress the accelerator
pedal, as soon as the mode D or R of the
automatic gearbox is selected.
e-Queueing
In the event of battery failure, it is
essential to place the chock(s)
supplied with the tool kit against one of the
wheels to immobilise the vehicle.
This function makes it possible to follow a
queue of vehicles with several stops followed
by restarts of the vehicle, using the e-Creeping,
e-Launch and electric driving modes.
Special aspects of automatic mode
This function allows parking manoeuvres to be
carried out at reduced speed with the help of
the electric motor when the mode D or R of the
automatic gearbox is selected.
These functions respond to common driving
situations where the electric motor is available
to provide additional power or zero-emission
driving.
These functions are only available if
the traction battery is sufficiently
charged.
These five functions cannot be deactivated.
6
e-Parking
e-Boost
This function allows simultaneous operation
of the petrol engine and the electric motor,
combined with the automatic gearbox.
By fully depressing the accelerator pedal ("kickdown" function), when the traction battery
87
Driving
is fully charged, it is possible to exceed the
torque of the petrol engine alone, thanks to
the additional torque provided by the electric
motor.
Repeated use of the brake pedal
causes the restart of petrol engine to
provide braking assistance.
Special aspects of low mode
The gearbox only changes from one gear to
another if the vehicle speed and engine speed
conditions permit.
The petrol engine can also be switched off in
low mode when stopped in traffic or when the
accelerator pedal is released.
If high traction is required, the driver
can deactivate the e-Auto mode using
the dashboard button.
Starting the vehicle
► Fully depress the brake pedal.
► Start the petrol engine by depressing the
brake pedal until the engine is running at a
stabilised engine speed.
► With your foot on the brake pedal, push
once or twice backwards to select automatic
mode D, or forwards to shift into reverse gear R.
► Release the brake pedal.
► Accelerate gradually to automatically
release the electric parking brake.
88
The petrol engine may stop after the first
start if operating conditions allow (e.g. state
of charge of the traction battery, external
temperature, efficiency of the catalytic
converter, torque demand, selected driving
mode, thermal comfort of the passenger
compartment).
Then, the vehicle moves off immediately in allelectric (e-Launch function).
Switching of the gearbox to back-up mode
Switching the vehicle off
Selector malfunction
Regardless of the current gearbox mode,
mode P is immediately engaged automatically
when the ignition is switched off.
However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged
after a delay of 5 seconds (time to enable freewheeling mode).
Check that mode P has been engaged and
that the electric parking brake was applied
automatically; if not, apply it manually.
The corresponding indicator lamps on
the gear selector and the electric
parking brake control must be on, as well as the
indicator lamps on the instrument panel.
Gearbox malfunction
This warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by an audible signal and
the display of a message.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h),
keeping to the speed limit.
Depending on the malfunction, the gearbox
only shifts in odd or even gears, locks in one
gear or loses some gears.
You may feel a significant jolt on engaging
reverse gear. This will not damage the gearbox.
In the event of a malfunction, an audible
warning sounds to indicate that the gearbox
should be put into Park mode.
Minor malfunction
This warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by the display of a
message and an audible signal.
Drive carefully.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
In some cases, the selector indicator lamps may
no longer come on, but the gearbox state is still
displayed on the instrument panel.
Major malfunction
This warning lamp comes on,
accompanied by the display of a
message.
You must stop the vehicle.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch off the ignition.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Driving
Drive selector (Electric)
N. Neutral
To move the vehicle with the ignition off
and so allow it to free-wheel.
For more information on Free-wheeling,
refer to the corresponding section.
D. Drive (automatic forward gear)
The drive selector is a pulse selector with a
regenerative braking function.
The drive selector provides traction control
based on the driving style, the road profile and
the vehicle load.
With regenerative braking activated, it also
manages engine braking when the accelerator
pedal is released.
P. Park
Button for parking the vehicle: the front
wheels are locked (the button lights up to
indicate that it is activated).
R. Reverse
To engage reverse gear, with your foot on
the brake pedal.
► In mode R, push backwards past the point of
resistance, mode D is selected.
► In mode D, push forwards past the point of
resistance, mode R is selected.
► To return to mode N, push without passing
the point of resistance.
C. Comfort (regenerative braking)
To reduce engine braking.
Regenerative braking
Information displayed on the
instrument panel
The mode C emulates engine braking, slowing
the vehicle with no need to depress the brake
pedal. The vehicle slows more quickly when the
driver releases the accelerator pedal.
The energy recovered when the accelerator
pedal is released is then used to partially
recharge the traction battery, thereby
increasing the vehicle's driving range.
When the ignition is switched on, the drive
selector status is displayed on the instrument
panel:
P : Park.
R : Reverse.
N : Neutral.
D : Drive (automatic forward gear).
C : Comfort.
Operation
► In mode N, with your foot on the brake
pedal, push without passing the point of
resistance:
• Forwards, mode R is selected.
• Backwards, mode D is selected.
Release the selector fully after each push; it
will then return to its initial position.
Special cases
To avoid mode N (quick change from D to R and
back again):
6
With the mode C and when decelerating
The resulting deceleration of the
vehicle does not cause the brake
lamps to come on.
► From mode D, press button C to activate/
deactivate the function (the button lights up
when the function is activated).
C is displayed on the instrument panel close
to D.
The status of the function is saved when the
ignition is switched off.
In some situations (e.g. battery full,
extreme temperatures), the amount of
89
Driving
regenerative braking may be temporarily
limited, resulting in less deceleration.
The driver must remain alert to traffic
conditions and must always be ready to use
the brake pedal.
With the brake pedal
When the brake pedal is depressed, the
intelligent braking system automatically
recovers some of the energy and uses it to
recharge the traction battery.
This energy recovery also reduces use of the
brake pads, thereby limiting their wear.
The driver may experience a different
sensation when depressing the brake
pedal compared to a vehicle without
regenerative braking.
90
slow down the amount of movement in order to
avoid any sudden jolts at the end of travel.
Unlike conventional suspension which absorbs
the energy but then partially returns some of it,
this active suspension absorbs and dissipates
this energy, without producing any rebound.
ECO driving mode
This mode reduces fuel consumption by
optimising the operation of the heating and air
conditioning systems, and on some versions,
the pedals, automatic gearbox and gear shift
indicator.
With petrol engines, coasting is used
wherever possible to slow the vehicle
without using engine braking.
Gear shift indicator
(Depending on engine)
This system is designed to reduce fuel
consumption by recommending the most
suitable gear.
Operation
Depending on the driving situation and
the vehicle's equipment, the system may
recommend skipping one or more gears.
Gear engagement recommendations are
not to be considered mandatory. Indeed, the
configuration of the road, the traffic density
and safety remain determining factors when
choosing the best gear. Therefore, the driver
remains responsible for deciding whether or not
to follow the system’s advice.
The system cannot be deactivated.
Progressive Hydraulic
Cushions
With an automatic gearbox, the
system is only active in manual
operation.
This suspension system with progressive
hydraulic cushions improves driving comfort by
filtering out the imperfections and demands of
the road surface.
Each shock absorber is equipped with a
hydraulic compression stop (at the base) and a
hydraulic rebound stop (at the top).
Depending on the intensity of the shock to be
absorbed, these stops provide the vehicle with
a greater freedom of movement or gradually
The information appears on the
instrument panel, in the form of an arrow
and the recommended gear.
► Press this button to activate/deactivate this
mode.
The button indicator lamp is illuminated,
accompanied by the ECO display on the
instrument panel, when the mode is activated.
The system adapts the gear change
instructions according to the driving
conditions (e.g. slope, load) and driving style
(e.g. power demand, acceleration, braking).
The system never suggests:
– engaging first gear.
Driving
– engaging reverse gear.
Operation
Hill start assist
This system keeps the vehicle briefly stationary
(for approximately 2 seconds) when making a
hill start, while you transfer your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
The system is only active when:
– The vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal.
– Certain slope conditions are met.
– The driver’s door is closed.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is
being held temporarily by hill start
assist.
If someone needs to get out of the vehicle
with the engine running, apply the parking
brake manually. Then check that the parking
brake indicator lamp and the P indicator
lamp in the electric parking brake control are
on fixed.
The hill start assist function cannot be
deactivated. However, using the
parking brake to immobilise the vehicle
interrupts its operation.
the instrument panel, accompanied by the
display of a message.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
6
Stop & Start (Petrol)
Facing uphill, with the vehicle stationary, the
vehicle is held for a short time when the driver
releases the brake pedal:
– If first gear or neutral is engaged on a manual
gearbox.
– If mode D, M or L is selected on an automatic
gearbox.
– If mode D or C is selected on the drive
selector.
The Stop & Start function puts the engine
temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during
phases when the vehicle is stationary (e.g. red
lights, traffic jams). The engine automatically
restarts - START mode - as soon as the driver
indicates the intention of moving off again.
Primarily designed for urban use, the function
is intended to reduce fuel consumption and
exhaust emissions as well as the noise level
when stationary.
The function does not affect the functionalities
of the vehicle, in particular the braking.
Deactivation/Reactivation
The function is activated by default when the
ignition is switched on.
To deactivate/reactivate the function:
Facing downhill, with the vehicle stationary
and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held
for a short time when the driver releases the
brake pedal.
Malfunction
If the event of a malfunction,
these warning lamps light up on
91
Driving
► Press the dashboard button.
A message on the instrument panel confirms
the change of status.
When the function is deactivated, the orange
indicator lamp is lit; if the engine was in
standby, it restarts immediately.
Associated indicator lamps
Function activated: engine on standby
(STOP mode).
Function deactivated or malfunction.
Opening the bonnet
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system
to avoid any risk of injury caused by the
engine restarting automatically.
Driving on flooded roads
Before entering into a flooded area,
it is strongly recommended that you
deactivate the Stop & Start system.
For more information on Driving
recommendations, particularly on flooded
roads, refer to the corresponding section.
92
Operation
Special cases
Main conditions for operation
The engine will not go into standby if the
conditions for operation are not met and in the
following cases:
– Steep slope (ascending or descending).
– Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h)
since the last engine start.
– Electric parking brake applied or being
applied.
– Needed to maintain a comfortable
temperature in the passenger compartment.
– Demisting active.
– Braking assistance being used.
In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes
for a few seconds, then goes off.
– The driver’s door must be closed.
– The driver's seat belt must be fastened.
– The level of charge in the battery must be
sufficient.
– The temperature of the engine must be
within its nominal operating range.
– The outside temperature must be between
0°C and 35°C.
Putting the engine into standby
(STOP mode)
The engine automatically enters standby mode
as soon as the driver indicates their intention
to stop:
– With a manual gearbox: when you place
the gear lever in neutral and release the clutch
pedal.
– With an automatic gearbox: with the gear
selector in mode D or M, when the brake pedal
is depressed until the vehicle stops or when the
mode N is selected, with the vehicle stationary.
After the engine has restarted, STOP
mode is not available until the vehicle
has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).
During parking manoeuvres, STOP
mode is not available for a few
seconds after coming out of reverse gear or
turning the steering wheel.
Time counter
A time counter adds up the time spent in
standby during the journey. It is reset to zero
every time the ignition is switched on.
Restarting the engine (START mode)
The engine automatically restarts as soon as
the driver indicates the intention of moving off
again:
With a manual gearbox: when the clutch pedal
is fully depressed.
With an automatic gearbox:
Driving
– With the selector in mode D or M: when the
brake pedal is released.
– With the selector in mode N and the brake
pedal released: when the mode D or M is
selected.
– With the selector in mode P and the brake
pedal depressed: when the mode R, N, D or M
is selected.
– When the reverse gear is engaged.
Special cases
The engine will restart automatically if the
conditions for operation are met again and in
the following cases:
– Some specific conditions (braking assistance,
air conditioning setting, etc.).
– With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed
exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h).
– With an automatic gearbox, in mode N,
vehicle speed exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h).
In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes
for a few seconds, then goes off.
Malfunctions
In the event of a fault with the system,
this warning lamp flashes for a few
moments on the instrument panel, then
remains on, accompanied by the display of a
message.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The vehicle stalls in STOP mode
All of the instrument panel warning lamps
come on if there is a fault.
► Switch off the ignition then start the engine
again.
12 V battery
The Stop & Start system requires
a 12 V battery of specific technology and
specification.
All work must be carried out only by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
e-Auto mode (Hybrid)
The petrol engine stops when low power or
torque is required and in stabilised conditions.
The petrol engine is restarted by the belt
starter.
The e-Auto mode can switch off the petrol
engine in the following cases:
– When the operating strategies permit.
– Vehicle speed up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
– When the driver releases the accelerator
pedal in stabilised conditions or in deceleration.
– During the stop phases.
Restarting is only achieved by the belt starter
until the torque demand is available, if the
traction battery is sufficiently charged. When
the torque demand is insufficient, the petrol
engine restarts.
Using the steering wheel paddles also
causes the restarting of petrol engine.
6
The e-Auto mode cannot switch off the petrol
engine in the following cases:
– The state of charge is less than 30% of the
traction battery energy.
– There is a need for vacuum brake assist
depending on the altitude.
– Maintaining thermal comfort in the
passenger compartment (heating, air
conditioning, demisting/defrosting).
Deactivation/Reactivation
By default, the function is activated when the
ignition is switched on.
The "e-Auto OFF" control on the dashboard
activates/deactivates the e-Auto mode.
► Press the dashboard button.
The display of a message on the instrument
panel confirms the change of state.
Function deactivated, this indicator
lights up in the instrument panel.
93
Driving
If high traction is required, the driver
can deactivate the e-Auto mode using
the dashboard button.
Tyre under-inflation
detection
This system alerts the driver if one or more
tyres suffer a drop in pressure.
The alert is raised when the vehicle is moving,
not when stationary.
It compares the information given by the wheel
speed sensors with reference values, which
must be reinitialised every time the tyre
pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed.
It takes into account the last values stored
during the reinitialisation request. It is therefore
essential that the tyre pressure is correct during
the operation. This operation is the driver’s
responsibility.
The tyre under-inflation detection
cannot, in any circumstances, replace
the need for vigilance on the part of the
driver.
This system does not avoid the need to
regularly check the tyre pressures (including
the spare wheel), especially before a long
journey.
Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly
in adverse conditions (heavy load, high
speed, long journey):
94
– worsens road-holding.
– lengthens braking distances.
– causes premature wear of the tyres.
– increases energy consumption.
The inflation pressures defined for the
vehicle can be found on the tyre
pressure label.
For more information on the Identification
markings, refer to the corresponding
section.
Checking tyre pressures
This check should be done monthly
when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped
for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6
miles (10 km) at moderate speeds).
Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures
shown on the label.
Snow chains
The system does not have to be
reinitialised after fitting or removing snow
chains.
Under-inflation alert
This is signalled by the fixed illumination
of this warning lamp, accompanied by an
audible signal and, depending on equipment,
the display of a message.
► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive
steering movements and avoid sudden braking.
► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so.
The loss of pressure detected may not
always cause visible deformation of
the tyre.
Do not rely on just a visual check.
► Using a compressor, such as the one in
the temporary puncture repair kit, check the
pressures of all four tyres when cold.
► If it is not possible to carry out this check
immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.
► In the event of a puncture, use the
temporary puncture repair kit or the spare
wheel (depending on equipment).
Driving too slowly may not ensure
optimum monitoring.
The alert is not immediately triggered in
the event of a sudden loss of pressure or
tyre blow-out. This is because analysis of the
values read by the wheel's speed sensors can
take several minutes.
The alert may be delayed at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h), or when adopting a
dynamic driving style.
The alert is kept active until the
system is reinitialised.
Driving
Reinitialisation
The system must be reinitialised after any
adjustment to the pressure of one or more
tyres, and after changing one or more wheels.
Before reinitialising the system, make
sure that the pressures of the four
tyres are correct for the conditions of use of
the vehicle and conform to the values
written on the tyre pressure label.
Check the pressures of the four tyres before
performing the reinitialisation.
The system does not advise if a pressure is
incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
With the vehicle stationary, the system can be
reinitialised via the instrument panel, using the
steering-mounted controls.
The reinitialisation is confirmed by the display
of a message and an audible signal.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction,
these warning lamps light up on
the instrument panel.
A message appears, accompanied by an audible
signal.
In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring
function is no longer performed.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Non-standard or 'space-saver' spare
wheel
The use of this type of spare wheel may
suspend tyre pressure monitoring.
In this case, the malfunction warning lamp
comes on and disappears once the wheel
has been replaced by one of uniform size
(the same as the others), the pressure
readjusted and the reinitialisation carried
out.
Driving and manoeuvring
aids - General
recommendations
Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot,
in any circumstances, replace the need
for vigilance on the part of the driver.
The driver must comply with the Highway
Code, must remain in control of the vehicle
in all circumstances and must be able to
retake control of it at all times. The driver
must adapt the speed to climatic conditions,
traffic and the state of the road.
It is the driver's responsibility to constantly
monitor traffic conditions, assess the
distance and relative speed of other vehicles,
and anticipate their manoeuvres before
using the direction indicator and changing
lanes.
These systems do not make it possible to
exceed the laws of physics.
6
Driving aids
You should hold the steering wheel
with both hands, always use the door and
interior mirrors, always leave your feet close
to the pedals and take a break every 2 hours.
Manoeuvring aids
The driver must always check the
surroundings of the vehicle before and
during the whole manoeuvre, in particular
using the mirrors.
Legal Obligations
In order to comply with European GSR v2
regulations and for safety reasons, these
functions cannot be partially or totally
deactivated by the driver:
– Speed Limit Information in the Road signs
recognition system.
– Active Safety Brake/Collision Risk Alert.
– Lane keeping assist.
– Parking sensors.
95
Driving
Driving aids camera
This camera and its associated
functions may be impaired or not work if
the windscreen area in front of the camera
is dirty, misty, frosty, covered with snow,
damaged or masked by a sticker.
In humid and cold weather, demist the
windscreen regularly.
Poor visibility (e.g. inadequate street lighting,
heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle
(e.g. headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low
sun, reflections on a damp road, leaving a
tunnel, alternating shade and light) can also
impair detection performance.
In the event of a windscreen replacement,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to recalibrate the camera;
otherwise, the operation of the associated
driving aids may be disrupted.
Other cameras
The images from the camera(s)
displayed on the touch screen or on the
instrument panel may be distorted by the
terrain.
In the presence of areas in shade, or in
conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate
lighting, the image may be darkened and
with lower contrast.
Obstacles may appear further away than
they actually are.
96
Sensors
The operation of the sensors, as well as
any associated functions, may be disrupted
by noise pollution such as that emitted by
noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries,
pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of
snow or dead leaves on the road or in the
event of damaged bumpers and mirrors.
When reverse gear is engaged, an audible
signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors
may be dirty.
A front or rear impact to the vehicle can
upset the sensors’ settings, which is not
always detected by the system: distance
measurements may be distorted.
The sensors do not systematically detect
obstacles that are too low (pavements,
studs) or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences).
Certain obstacles located in the sensors’
blind spots may not be detected or may no
longer be detected during the manoeuvre.
Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound
waves: pedestrians may not be detected.
Maintenance
Clean the bumpers and door mirrors
and the field of vision of the cameras
regularly.
When washing your vehicle at high pressure,
direct the spray from at least 30 cm away
from the sensors and cameras.
Mats/Pedal trims
The use of mats or pedal trims not
approved by CITROËN may interfere with
the operation of the speed limiter or cruise
control.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals:
– Ensure that the mat is secured correctly.
– Never fit one mat on top of another.
Units of speed
Ensure that the units of speed
displayed on the instrument panel (mph
or km/h) are those for the country you are
driving in.
If this is not the case, when the vehicle is
stationary, set the display to the required
units of speed so that it complies with what
is authorised locally.
In case of doubt, contact a CITROËN dealer
or a qualified workshop.
Road signs recognition
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Driving
This system displays the maximum speed
authorised locally on the instrument panel,
using:
– Speed limit signs detected by the camera.
– Speed limit information from the connected
services.
– Signs indicating a shared traffic zone
detected by the camera.
Sign detected
Suggested speed
(calculated)
Entry into a shared
traffic zone
Example:
10 mph or 20 km/h
(depending on
the units on the
instrument panel)
– Some supplementary traffic signs detected
by the camera.
Supplementary
traffic sign
detected
Display of the speed
associated with
the supplementary
traffic sign
Supplementary
traffic sign
detected
Display of the speed
associated with
the supplementary
traffic sign
Speed limit when
raining
Examples:
If the wiper control
stalk is in the
"intermittent wipe"
or "automatic wipe"
position (in order
to activate the rain
sensor):
68 mph (110 km/h)
(for example)
Speed limit in case
of snow
Example:
If the outside
temperature is
below 3°C:
19 mph (30 km/h)
(for example)
with a "snowflake"
symbol
Speed limit when
towing
If an approved
towing device is
fixed to the vehicle:
56 mph (90 km/h)
(for example)
Speed limit
applicable over a
certain distance
Example:
43 mph (70 km/h)
(for example)
6
To get valid speed limit information,
the vehicle's current position is sent
via the telematics unit and is immediately
deleted after processing.
Tracking of the vehicle position is not
possible at any time.
This is not impacted by the privacy settings
of the connected services.
The units for the speed limit (mph or
km/h) depend on the country you are
driving in.
This should be taken into account to ensure
you observe the speed limit.
For the system to work properly when
changing countries, the speed unit of the
instrument panel must match that of the
country you are driving in.
97
Driving
Automatic sign reading is a driving aid
system and does not always display
the correct speed limits.
The speed limit signs present on the road
always take priority over those displayed by
the system.
The system is designed to detect signs that
conform to the Vienna Convention on road
signs.
Specific speed limits, such as those for
heavy goods vehicles, are not
displayed.
The display of the speed limit on the
instrument panel is updated when passing
a speed limit sign intended for cars (light
vehicles).
Information displayed on
the instrument panel
1. Detected speed limit indication
or
2. End of speed limit indication (depending on
version)
If the vehicle continues to exceed it, the speed
is displayed and flashes for a few more seconds,
accompanied by an audible signal.
The system is active but is not detecting speed
limit information.
On detecting speed limit information, the
system displays the value, accompanied by an
audible signal.
This audible signal is emitted if the
Speed limit change sound is activated
previously in the Road Signs function of the
instrument panel menu.
For a suggested maximum speed, when the
vehicle exceeds it, the speed is displayed and
flashes for several seconds.
Operating limits
The system may not display the speed limit if
it does not detect a speed limit sign within a
preset period and in the following situations:
– Non-standard road signs.
– Road signs that are obstructed, damaged or
bent.
Settings
Deactivation/Activation
By default, the overspeed alert sound is
automatically activated at every engine start.
Press this dashboard button to activate/
deactivate the speed limit change sound, or via
the instrument panel menu, using the steeringmounted controls (depending on version).
The system cannot be deactivated.
The speed limit change sound is saved
when the ignition is switched off.
98
Driving
In the event of the speed limit change
sound deactivation, this warning lamp
lights up a few seconds on the instrument
panel.
Country selection
The list of detected road signs can be updated
by selecting a specific country.
► The desired country can be selected via the
instrument panel (Country selection menu),
using the steering-mounted controls.
The current country is displayed under
the function name in the settings
screen.
The country selection is saved when the
ignition is switched off.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, this
warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel with the message
"Driving Assistance Sensor blind: Clean
sensor, see User Manual" if the sensor is
masked.
This is a normal behavior, which does not
request the support of a qualified workshop.
In this case, stop the vehicle and verify if the
front camera is covered by dirt, mud, sand,
snow, ice or anything preventing the sensing.
The system is operational again after the
detection field has been cleaned.
Steering-mounted controls
6
Overspeed alert
(Depending on country of sale)
An audible overspeed alert is triggered
when the vehicle exceeds predefined speed
threshold.
When the vehicle speed is greater than 75 mph
(120 km/h), the alert is emitted every 2 seconds.
This system cannot be modified nor
deactivated.
1. Speed limiter selection/deselection
2. Pause/Reactivate the speed limitation at the
previously saved speed setting
Speed limiter
3. Increase/Decrease the speed setting
Activate the speed limitation
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Information displayed on
the instrument panel
This system prevents the vehicle from
exceeding the speed programmed by
the driver (speed setting).
The speed limiter is switched on manually.
The minimum speed setting is 19 mph
(30 km/h).
4. Speed limiter mode selection indication
5. Speed limitation on/off indication
99
Driving
6. Speed setting value
Switching on/Pausing
► Press twice button 1-MODE to select speed
limiter mode ; the function is paused.
► If the speed limit setting is suitable (most
recent speed setting programmed in the
system), press one of the buttons 3-SET to
switch the speed limiter on.
► Or pressing button 2-II> activates the
function.
► Pressing button 2-II> temporarily pauses the
function.
► Pressing button 2-II> again resumes the
function.
Adjusting the speed setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on
in order to set the speed.
100
To change the speed setting using the vehicle’s
current speed:
► For steps of +/- 1 mph (1 km/h), make
successive short presses upwards/downwards
on 3 to increase/decrease.
► For steps of +/- 5 mph (5 km/h), press and
hold upwards/downwards on 3 to increase/
decrease.
Temporarily exceeding the
speed setting
► Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The speed limiter is temporarily deactivated
and the displayed speed setting flashes.
► Release the accelerator pedal to return to
below the speed setting.
When exceeding the speed is not due to the
driver's action (e.g. in case of a steep slope), an
audible signal is triggered immediately.
On a steep descent or in the event of
sharp acceleration, the speed limiter
will not be able to prevent the vehicle from
exceeding the speed setting.
If necessary, apply the brakes to control your
vehicle’s speed.
When the vehicle speed returns to the speed
setting level, the speed limiter operates again:
the speed setting display becomes fixed again.
Off
► Press 1-MODE: the speed limiter information
display disappears.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, dashes are
displayed flashing and then fixed instead of the
speed setting.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Cruise control - Specific
recommendations
The cruise control function does not
guarantee compliance with the
maximum authorised speed and the safety
distance between vehicles, the driver
remains responsible for their driving.
In the interest of public safety, only use
cruise control if the traffic conditions enable
vehicles to drive at a steady speed and
maintain an adequate safety distance.
Remain vigilant while cruise control is
activated. If you press and hold one of the
speed setting modification buttons, your
vehicle may change speed very abruptly.
When descending a steep hill, the cruise
control system cannot prevent the vehicle
from exceeding the set speed. Brake if
necessary to control the vehicle speed.
Driving
On steep climbs or when towing, the set
speed may not be reached or maintained.
Exceeding the programmed speed
setting
You can temporarily exceed the speed
setting by pressing the accelerator pedal
(the programmed speed flashes).
To return to the speed setting, release the
accelerator pedal (when the set speed is
reached again, the displayed speed stops
flashing).
Operating limits
Never use the system in the following
situations:
– In an urban area with the risk of
pedestrians crossing the road.
– In heavy traffic.
– On winding or steep roads.
– On slippery or flooded roads.
– In poor weather conditions.
– In the event of restricted visibility for the
driver.
– Driving on a speed circuit.
– Driving on a rolling road.
– When using a ‘space-saver’ type spare
wheel.
– When using snow chains or non-slip
covers.
Cruise control
Steering-mounted controls
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids and the
Specific recommendations on cruise
control.
This system automatically maintains the
vehicle’s speed at the value programmed
by the driver (speed setting), without the use of
the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is switched on manually.
It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph
(40 km/h).
With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher
must be engaged.
With an automatic gearbox, mode D or
second gear or higher in mode M or L must be
engaged.
With a drive selector, mode D or C must be
engaged.
Cruise control remains active after
changing gear, regardless of the
gearbox type, on engines fitted with the
Stop & Start function.
6
1. Cruise control selection/deselection
2. Pause/Reactivate the cruise control at the
previously saved speed setting
3. Increase/Decrease the speed setting
Activation of cruise control in progress
Information displayed on
the instrument panel
Switching off the ignition cancels any
speed setting.
4. Cruise control mode selection indication
5. Cruise control on/off indication
101
Driving
6. Speed setting value
Switching on/Pausing
► Press once button 1-MODE briefly to select
cruise control mode ; the function is paused.
► Accelerate to the desired speed and then
press one of the buttons 3-SET to activate the
cruise control; the vehicle’s current speed is
saved as the speed setting.
► Release the accelerator pedal.
► Pressing button 2-II> temporarily pauses the
function.
► Pressing button 2-II> or one of the buttons
3-SET again resumes operation of the cruise
control at the previously saved speed setting.
Cruise control operation can also be
interrupted temporarily:
– by pressing the brake pedal.
102
– by depressing the clutch pedal for more
5 seconds (manual gearbox).
– by shifting to neutral or engaging reverse
gear.
– automatically, if the electronic stability
control (ESC) system is triggered.
Malfunction
Modifying the speed setting
Active Safety Brake with
Collision Risk Alert and
Intelligent emergency
braking assistance
The cruise control must be active.
To change the speed setting using the vehicle’s
current speed:
► For steps of +/- 1 mph (1 km/h), make
successive short presses upwards/
downwards on 3 to increase/decrease.
► For steps of +/- 5 mph (5 km/h), press and
hold upwards/downwards on 3 to increase/
decrease.
In the event of a malfunction, dashes are
displayed flashing and then fixed instead of the
speed setting.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Prolonged pressing and holding
upwards/downwards on 3 causes a
very rapid change in vehicle speed.
As a precaution, we recommend
setting a cruise speed fairly close to
the current speed of your vehicle, to avoid
any sudden acceleration or deceleration of
the vehicle.
Off
► Press 1-MODE: the cruise control
information display disappears.
This system:
– warns the driver that their vehicle is at
risk of collision with the preceding vehicle, a
pedestrian or a cyclist.
– reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a
collision or to limit its severity.
The system also takes motorcyclists
into account.
It may also react on animals. Animals
(especially animals smaller than 0.5 m) and
Driving
objects on the road are not necessarily
detected.
This system includes three functions:
– Collision Risk Alert.
– Intelligent emergency braking assistance
(iEBA).
– Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency
braking).
The vehicle has a camera located at the top of
the windscreen.
This system does not replace the need
for driver vigilance.
This system is designed to assist the driver
and improve road safety.
It is the driver's responsibility to continuously
monitor traffic conditions in accordance
with applicable driving regulations.
As soon as the system detects a
potential collision, it prepares the
braking circuit. This may cause a slight noise
and a slight sensation of deceleration.
Operating conditions and
limits
Vehicle moving forward without trailer.
Brake system operational.
ASR system activated.
Seat belts fastened for driver and front
passenger.
Stabilised speed on roads with no or low
curvature.
This warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel without any additional
message, to indicate that the automatic braking
system is not available.
This is a normal behavior indicating that a
condition is not fulfilled and which does not
request the support of a workshop.
In any situations with ignition on where
automatic braking presents a risk, deactivating
the system via the vehicle's configuration menu
is recommended, for instance:
– Towing a trailer (particularly a trailer without
its own braking system).
– Carrying long objects on roof bars.
– Driving with snow chains.
– Using an automatic car wash.
– Performing any maintenance (e.g. changing
a wheel, working inside the engine
compartment).
– Placing the vehicle on a rolling bench in a
workshop.
– Towing the vehicle.
– When a "space-saver" type spare wheel is
fitted (depending on version).
– If the brake lamps are not working.
– Following a damage of the windscreen close
to the detection camera.
6
The system is automatically
deactivated once the use of a different
diameter "space-saver" type spare wheel is
detected, or if a fault with the right or left
brake lamp is detected.
Following a severe crash (e.g. with airbag
deployment), the system is automatically
deactivated.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The system performance may be degraded or
not available by:
– Sensor covered with snow, ice, slush, mud or
dirt.
– Windscreen damaged or smeared, with
blurred view or covered with foreign items
(e.g. stickers).
– Front camera out of regular position or
missing cover.
– Brake discs cooling process is on-going.
– In curves.
– System initialization process after battery
disconnection.
– Sun or lights shining into the front camera
lens.
– Adverse environmental conditions (e.g. rain,
fog or snow).
103
Driving
– Vehicle ahead creating road spray.
The system performance may be affected by:
– Vehicle stability system in progress.
– Vehicle battery voltage out of range.
– Wet road reflecting lights.
– Close vehicles ahead.
– Tractors, muddy vehicles or vehicles with a
trailer.
– Banked roads.
– Winding or hilly roads.
– Poor lighting conditions.
– Sudden lighting changes.
– Vehicle modifications (e.g. tyres).
In case the detection is degraded or
temporarily unavailable by
environment conditions, then a driver
indication is not displayed (because a driver
action is not requested).
order.
It can be dangerous to drive if the
brake lamps are not in perfect working
The driver must not overload the
vehicle (keep within the GVW limit and
load height limits for roof bars).
Collision Risk Alert
This function warns the driver if there is a risk
of collision with the preceding vehicle, or with a
pedestrian or cyclist.
104
Modifying the alert trigger threshold
The trigger threshold determines the sensitivity
with which the function warns of the risk of
collision.
The selected threshold is memorised when the
ignition is switched off.
The threshold is set via the instrument panel
menu, using the steering-mounted controls.
► Select one of the three pre-defined
thresholds: "Far", "Medium" or "Near".
Operation
Depending on the collision risk detected by the
system and the alert trigger threshold chosen
by the driver, different levels of alert may be
triggered and displayed on the instrument
panel.
The system takes into account the vehicle
dynamics, the difference speed of the own
vehicle and the object identified for the
collision risk, and the operation of the vehicle
(e.g. actions on the pedals, steering wheel) to
trigger the alert at the most relevant moment.
With LCD instrument panel
Level 1: visual and audible alert, warning
that a collision is imminent.
The message "BRAKE!" is displayed.
Level 2: a micro-braking may be given,
confirming the risk of collision (optional).
With matrix instrument panel
(orange)
Level 1: visual alert only, warning that the
preceding vehicle is very close.
The message "Vehicle close" is displayed.
(red)
Level 2: visual and audible alert, warning
that a collision is imminent.
The message "Brake!" is displayed.
Level 3: a micro-braking may be given,
confirming the risk of collision (optional).
While approaching a vehicle too
quickly, the level 2 alert may be
displayed directly.
Important: the level 1 alert depends on the
trigger threshold selected. It reacts only on
moving vehicles. It is disabled automatically
at lower speed.
It is possible that collision warnings
are not given, are given too late or
seem unjustified.
The driver must always stay in control of the
vehicle and be prepared to react at any time
to avoid an accident.
Intelligent emergency
braking assistance (iEBA)
This function increases vehicle deceleration
if the driver does not brake enough to avoid a
collision.
This assistance is only provided if the driver
presses the brake pedal.
Driving
Active Safety Brake
This function, also called "automatic emergency
braking", intervenes after the acoustic alert if
the driver does not operate the brake pedal
quickly enough.
The system aims at reducing the speed of
impact or avoiding a collision if the driver fails
to react.
Below a speed of 30 mph (50 km/h),
automatic emergency braking may
slow down the vehicle to a complete stop.
Automatic emergency braking may reduce
the speed by a maximum of 30 mph
(50 km/h) speed.
Operation
The system operates subject to the following
conditions:
– At reduced speed in an urban environment,
when a stationary vehicle, pedestrian or cyclist
is detected.
– The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and
84 mph (10 km/h and 135 km/h) when a moving
vehicle is detected.
This warning lamp flashes during the
intervention as soon as the function
applies the vehicle’s brakes.
During the flashing time, the function is not
available.
With an automatic gearbox or drive selector,
in the event of automatic emergency braking,
keep the brake pedal depressed, also after
a complete stop is reached, to prevent the
vehicle from rolling away.
With a manual gearbox, in the event of
automatic emergency braking bringing the
vehicle to a complete stop, the engine may
stall.
The driver can override the automatic
emergency braking at any time by
strongly turning the steering wheel (evasive
manoeuver) and/or by firmly pressing the
accelerator pedal.
The brake pedal may feel hard and
vibrate slightly while the function is
operating.
If the vehicle comes to a complete stop,
automatic braking is maintained for 1 to
2 seconds.
6
Deactivation/Activation
By default, the system is automatically
activated at every engine start.
The settings are changed via the instrument
panel menu, using the steering-mounted
controls.
Deactivation of the system is signalled
by the illumination of this warning lamp,
accompanied by the display of a message.
The system cannot be deactivated
above 10 km/h.
Malfunction
This warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel with the message
"Driving Assistance Sensor blind: Clean
sensor, see User Manual" if the sensor is
masked.
This is a normal behavior, which does not
request the support of a qualified workshop.
In this case, stop the vehicle and verify if the
front camera or the front radar is covered by
dirt, mud, sand, snow, ice or anything preventing
the sensing.
105
Driving
The system is operational again after the
detection field has been cleaned.
In the event of a malfunction, this
warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel, accompanied by the display
of a message and an audible signal.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
If these warning lamps come on
after the engine has been
switched off and then restarted, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop to have
the system checked.
These warning lamps light up on
the instrument panel and/or in
the warning lamp display for seat belts and
front passenger airbag to indicate that the
driver's and/or front passenger's seat belt is not
fastened (depending on version). The automatic
braking system is deactivated until the seat
belts are fastened.
Distraction detection
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
The function comprises the "Coffee Break
Alert" system combined with the "Driver
Attention Warning" system.
106
These systems are in no way designed
to keep the driver awake or to prevent
the driver from falling asleep at the wheel.
It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if
feeling tired.
Take a break if you are feeling tired or at
least every 2 hours.
These systems reset themselves if one of the
following conditions is met:
– The ignition has been switched off for a few
minutes.
– The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their
door is opened.
Coffee Break Alert
The system triggers an alert when it
detects that the driver has not taken a
break after two hours of driving at a speed
above 40 mph (65 km/h).
This alert is issued via the display of a message
encouraging the driver to take a break,
accompanied by an audible signal.
If the driver does not follow this advice, the
alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is
stopped.
As soon as the speed of the vehicle
drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the
system goes into standby.
Driving time starts being counted again once
the speed reaches above 40 mph (65 km/h).
Driver Attention Warning
The system assesses the driver's level of
alertness, fatigue and distraction by
identifying changes in driver's steering patterns.
To do this, the system monitores the steering
movements based in the driver input.
This system is particularly suited to fast roads
(speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)).
The system may perform a learning
procedure for up to 30 minutes after
the start of the monitoring.
During this period, the driver's individual
driving behaviour is analysed and no alert is
given.
At a first alert level, when the driver is drowsy,
the driver is warned by the message "Take a
break", accompanied by an audible signal.
At a second alert level, when the driver is highly
drowsy, the driver is warned by the message
Driving
"Take a break", accompanied by a longer
audible signal.
– Driving on off-road.
– Driving on racing circuits.
In certain driving conditions (poor road
surface or strong winds), the system
may give alerts independent of the driver's
level of vigilance.
Deactivation/Activation
The following situations may interfere
with the operation of the system or
prevent it from working:
– poor visibility (e.g. inadequate street
lighting, heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall).
– dazzle (e.g. headlamps of an oncoming
vehicle, low sun, reflections on a damp road,
leaving a tunnel, alternating shade and light).
– windscreen area located in front of the
camera (e.g. dirty, misted, frost-covered,
snow-covered, damaged or masked by a
sticker).
– lane markings absent, worn, hidden
(e.g. snow, mud, dead leaves) or multiple
(roadworks).
– close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings
not detected).
– roads that are narrow, winding.
Risk of undesirable operation
The system should be deactivated in the
following situations:
– When a "space-saver" spare wheel is fitted.
– When the vehicle is towed.
By default, the function is automatically
activated at every engine start.
The settings can be changed via the instrument
panel menu, using the steering-mounted
controls.
Deactivation is confirmed by the
illumination of this indicator lamp on the
instrument panel.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, this
warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel with the message
"Driving Assistance Sensor blind: Clean
sensor, see User Manual" if the sensor is
masked.
This is a normal behavior, which does not
request the support of a qualified workshop.
In this case, stop the vehicle and verify if the
front camera is covered by dirt, mud, sand,
snow, ice or anything preventing the sensing.
The system is operational again after the
detection field has been cleaned.
Lane departure warning
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
6
This system, using a camera which recognises
solid or broken lines, detects the involuntary
crossing of longitudinal traffic lane markings on
the ground.
If the driver's attention drops and the speed
is higher than 37 mph (60 km/h), the system
triggers a warning if there is an unexpected
change of direction.
This system is particularly useful on motorways
and main roads.
Detection
If an unexpected change of direction is
detected, this warning lamp flashes in
the instrument panel accompanied by an
audible signal.
No warning is transmitted while the direction
indicator is activated and for approximately
20 seconds after the direction indicator is
switched off.
107
Driving
Malfunction
Operating conditions
In the event of a malfunction,
these warning lamps come on on
the instrument panel, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible signal.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
– Vehicle speed between 37 and 109 mph (60
and 175 km/h).
– Road marked with a central dividing line.
– Steering wheel held with both hands.
– Direction indicators off upon activation of
the system.
– ESC system activated and operational.
Lane keeping assist
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
The system corrects the vehicle's trajectory by
alerting the driver as soon as it detects a risk
of involuntary lane departure or crossing of a
verge or hard shoulder (depending on version).
To do this, the system uses a camera, placed on
the upper part of the windscreen, identifying
the lane markings on the ground and the side
of the road (depending on version).
This system is particularly useful on
motorways and main roads.
108
The system helps the driver only if
there is a risk of the vehicle
unintentionally wandering from the lane it is
being driven in. It does not manage the safe
driving distance, vehicle speed or braking.
The driver must hold the steering wheel
with both hands so that they can maintain
control when the conditions no longer allow
the system to intervene (e.g. in the event
that the central dividing line marking on the
road surface disappears).
Operation
As soon as the system identifies a risk of
involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings
detected on the ground or a lane boundary
(e.g. grass verge), it performs the trajectory
correction necessary to restore the vehicle to
its original lane.
The driver will notice a turning movement of
the steering wheel.
This warning lamp flashes during
trajectory correction.
The driver can prevent the correction
by firmly holding the steering wheel
(e.g. during an emergency manoeuvre).
The correction is interrupted immediately if
the direction indicators are operated.
While the direction indicators are activated and
for a few seconds after switching them off, the
system considers that a change of trajectory
is intentional and no correction is triggered
during this period.
Driving
Driving situations and related alerts
The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations.
The actual order of display of these alerts may be different.
Function status
Display
OFF
ON
ON
Comments
Function deactivated.
None.
ON
ON
6
System active, conditions not met:
– Speed below 37 mph (60 km/h).
– No lane marking recognised.
– ESC operation triggered.
– Dynamic driving style.
Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (e.g. detection of a trailer, use of the
"space-saver" type spare wheel supplied with the vehicle, failure).
None.
Lane marking detected.
Speed above 37 mph (60 km/h).
The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of line crossing is
detected. The driver's hands are on the steering wheel.
109
Driving
Function status
Display
Comments
ON
"Make sure you stay in the
lane"
Operating limits
The system goes into standby automatically in
the following cases:
– ESC deactivated or operation triggered.
– Speed below 37 mph (60 km/h) or greater
than 109 mph (175 km/h).
– Electrical connection to a trailer.
– Use of a "space-saver" spare wheel detected
(as detection is not immediate, deactivation of
the system is recommended).
– Dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
the brake or accelerator pedal.
– Driving over lane markings.
– Activation of the direction indicators.
– Crossing the inside line on a bend.
– Driving on a tight bend.
– Driving on hilly roads.
110
If, while correcting the trajectory, the system determines that the correction will not be
enough and that a solid line will be crossed: the driver is warned that they must provide
additional trajectory adjustment.
If a trajectory correction lasts more than 10 seconds, the driver is warned with an
audible warning accompanied by a message. If the driver is still unable to keep the
vehicle in the lane, the correction interrupts after a short time.
If the steering wheel is not held properly, an audible warning sounds, accompanied by
a message, until the trajectory correction is completed or the driver has grasped the
steering wheel correctly.
The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple corrections are performed
in quick succession. The warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver
responds.
– Inactivity by the driver detected during
correction.
The following situations may interfere
with the operation of the system or
prevent it from working:
– Insufficient contrast between the road
surface and the verge or hard shoulder
(e.g. shade).
– Lane markings worn, hidden (e.g. snow,
mud) or multiple (e.g. roadworks).
– Close proximity to the vehicle in front
(lane markings may not be detected).
– Roads that are narrow, winding.
Risk of undesirable operation
The system should be deactivated in the
following situations:
– When changing a wheel or working near a
wheel.
– Towing or with a bicycle carrier on a towing
device, especially with trailer not plugged in or
not approved.
– Road in poor condition, unstable or with very
poor grip (risk of aquaplaning, snow, ice).
– Adverse weather conditions.
– Driving on racing circuits.
– Driving on a rolling road.
Deactivation/Activation
Due to legal requirements, the system is
automatically activated at every engine start.
Driving
The system is operational again after the
detection field has been cleaned.
Audible assistance
6
Parking sensors
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
► Press the dashboard button to deactivate/
reactivate the system at any time.
Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination of
the button indicator lamp, accompanied by the
display of a message on the instrument panel.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, the
warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
This warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel with the message
"Driving Assistance Sensor blind: Clean
sensor, see User Manual" if the sensor is
masked.
This is a normal behavior, which does not
request the support of a qualified workshop.
In this case, stop the vehicle and verify if the
front camera is covered by dirt, mud, sand,
snow, ice or anything preventing the sensing.
This system detects and signals the proximity
of obstacles (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree,
barrier) using sensors located in the bumper.
Rear parking sensors
System startup is available when reverse gear is
engaged.
It is indicated by an audible confirmation signal
and a display indication.
If no audible signal is given, the display
indication is not shown or a warning message
appears, the system has a failure.
The system signals the presence of obstacles
which are within the sensors’ detection zone .
The proximity information is given by an
intermittent audible signal, the frequency of
which increases as the vehicle approaches the
obstacle.
When the distance between the vehicle and
the obstacle becomes less than about thirtyfive centimetres, the audible signal becomes
continuous.
The sound is emitted by the buzzer of the
instrument panel.
The audible signal is automatically suspended
when the vehicle is stationary for a few
seconds.
The audible signal is automatically restored
when the vehicle approaches again the
obstacle.
111
Driving
Visual assistance
The rear parking sensors system will be
deactivated automatically if a trailer or
bicycle carrier is connected to a towing
device installed in accordance with the
Manufacturer's recommendations.
Operating limits
This supplements the audible signal, without
taking account of the vehicle's trajectory, by
displaying bars on the screen whose location
represents the distance between the obstacle
and the vehicle (green: more distant, yellow:
distant, orange: close, red: very close).
This warning lamp flashes during
obstacle detection on the instrument
panel.
For versions without touch screen,
only this warning lamp flashes on the
instrument panel.
Deactivation/Activation
(Depending on country of sale)
By default, the audible signal is automatically
activated at each time the reverse gear is
engaged.
The system cannot be manually
deactivated.
112
If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may
tilt, affecting distance measurements.
In case of a gearbox failure, the system is not
active, when the reverse gear is engaged.
If the rear sensors are covered by dirt,
mud, sand, snow, ice or anything
preventing the sensing, stop the vehicle.
The system is operational again after the
detection field has been cleaned.
Reversing camera
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on the use
of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Malfunction
In case of display or buzzer
malfunction (e.g. frozen image, black
screen), the system may be disturbed or
unavailable.
In the event of a sensor
malfunction, these warning lamps
light up on the instrument panel, accompanied
by the display of a message and an audible
signal.
In the event of any other malfunction,
this warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel, accompanied by the display
of a message.
Have it checked by a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
The reversing camera is activated automatically
when reverse gear is engaged.
The image is displayed on the touch screen.
The reversing camera function may be
supplemented by the parking sensors.
Driving
6
The blue lines 1 indicate the general direction of
the vehicle (the gap corresponds to the width
of your vehicle including the mirrors).
The red line 2 represents a distance of about
30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear
bumper.
The green lines 3 represent distances of about 1
and 2 metres beyond the edge of your vehicle's
rear bumper.
It is normal to have a part of the number plate
showing at the bottom of the screen.
Clean the reversing camera regularly
using a soft, dry cloth.
113
FILL UP WITH
CONFIDENCE
WITH QUARTZ LUBRICANTS
* 1L & 5L produced in Europe
Partners for more than 50 years, Citroën &
TotalEnergies share common values:
t e c h n o l o g y, c r e a t i v i t y, i n n o v a t i o n .
TotalEnergies equips Citroën vehicles with
Quartz lubricants from their first filling in the
factory through to the authorised servicing
dealer network to guarantee them optimal
performance on a daily basis. Especially
designed for Citroën vehicles, Quartz
lubricants make them even more powerful,
more fuel efficient and more environmentally
friendly. For the servicing of your Citroën, fill
up with confidence with Quartz lubricants!
Keep your engine younger for
longer!
Quartz Ineo Xtra First 0W-20 is a very highperformance lubricant resulting from the joint
work of the Citroën and TotalEnergies R&D
teams. Its innovative technology extends your
engine’s life while achieving significant fuel
savings and thus limiting CO2 emissions. The
product is now available in new packaging*
made of 50% recycled material and which is
100% recyclable.
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels
Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228
standard containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol
respectively.
The only petrol fuel additives
authorised for use are those that meet
the B715001 standard.
Travelling abroad
Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s
engine.
In certain countries, the use of a particular
fuel may be required (specific octane rating,
specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct
operation of the engine.
For any additional information, consult a dealer.
Refuelling
Fuel tank capacity: approximately 44 litres.
Reserve level: approximately 5 litres.
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level is reached, this
warning lamp lights up on the
instrument panel, accompanied by the display
of a message and an audible signal. When it
first comes on, about 5 litres of fuel remain.
Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp
appears every time the ignition is switched on,
accompanied by the message and the audible
signal. When driving, this message and audible
signal are repeated with increasing frequency as
the fuel level drops towards 0.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid
running out of fuel.
A small arrow by the warning lamp
indicates which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler flap is located on.
Stop & Start / e-Auto mode
Never refuel with the engine in STOP
mode or in stand-by; you must switch off the
ignition.
Refuelling
When refuelling, at least 5 litres must be added
in order to be registered by the fuel gauge.
Opening the filler cap may create a noise
caused by an inrush of air. This vacuum is
normal, caused by the sealing of the fuel
system.
To refuel in complete safety:
► Always switch off the engine.
7
► With the vehicle unlocked, press the rearcentral part of the filler flap to open it.
► Take care to select the pump that delivers
the correct fuel type for your vehicle's engine
(see a reminder label on the inside of the filler
flap).
► Turn the filler cap to the left, remove it and
place it on its support (on the filler flap).
► Insert the filler nozzle and push it in as far as
possible before starting to refuel (to minimise
the risk of splashing).
Do not continue after the nozzle’s third cutout. Doing so may cause malfunctions.
► Put the filler cap back in place and turn it to
the right.
► Close the fuel filler flap.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for
the vehicle, you must have the fuel
tank drained and filled with the correct fuel
before starting the engine.
115
Practical information
The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter,
which helps to reduce the level of harmful
emissions in the exhaust gases.
For petrol engines, you must use unleaded
fuel.
The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded
petrol nozzles only.
Fuel cut-off
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device
which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a
collision.
Electrified
vehicles - General
recommendations
These recommendations and general
information concern electrified vehicles of the
type: hybrid and electric.
High voltage system
High voltage system voltage is
dangerous and can cause burns or
other injuries or even fatal electric shock.
Since damage to high voltage components is
not visible, CITROËN recommends that you:
– Never touch the components, damaged
or not, and never let your jewelry or other
metallic objects come into contact with
these components.
116
– Never work on the high voltage cables
(purple or orange) or on any other high
voltage component marked with the
Electric risk label. Any intervention on the
high voltage system must be carried out by
qualified persons in workshops qualified and
approved to carry out this type of work.
– Never damage, modify or remove the
high voltage cables (purple or orange) or
disconnect them from the high voltage
network.
– Never open, modify or remove the cover of
the traction battery.
– Never work with cutting and forming
tools or heat sources near high voltage
components and cables.
In case of low level of fluid in the cooling
tank, the refilling shall only be performed in a
qualified and trained workshop to verify that
the leakage is not in the traction battery.
Any intervention on the high voltage system
must be carried out by qualified persons in
workshops qualified and approved to carry
out this type of work.
Damage to the vehicle or the traction
battery could result in the leakage of toxic
gases or fluids either immediately or later.
CITROËN recommends that you:
– Always inform the fire and emergency
services in the event of an incident, warning
that the vehicle is equipped with a traction
battery.
– Never touch the liquids leaking from the
traction battery.
– Do not inhale the gases emitted by the
traction battery which are toxic.
– Move away from the vehicle in the event
of incident or accident, the gases emitted
being flammable and could cause a fire.
Traction battery
Traction battery overheating
If the following warning lamps
appear, accompanied by the
display of a message and an audible signal, it is
required to:
► Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in the
best conditions of safety.
► Switch off the ignition.
► Evacuate the vehicle as quickly as possible
and move to a safe distance.
► Call the fire department and/or the
emergency services and tell them that the
vehicle is an electric one.
Danger of death / Risk of serious
injury
A chain reaction can occur up to a traction
battery fire.
Practical information
In the event of damage to the
traction battery
It is strictly prohibited to work on the vehicle
yourself.
Do not touch liquids coming from the
battery, and in the event of skin contact with
these products, wash abundantly with water
and contact a doctor as soon as possible.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have the system checked.
Disposal of the traction battery
The traction battery is designed for the life
of the vehicle if the recommendations of
CITROËN are followed.
If it becomes necessary to replace the battery,
contact the CITROËN dealer for instructions on
its disposal. Improper disposal carries the risk of
severe burns, electric shock, and damage to the
environment.
In accordance with regulations, CITROËN
ensures a second life or recycling of this
component in collaboration with qualified
operators.
Hybrid system
Electrical system
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on
electrified vehicles.
The electrical circuit of the hybrid system is
identified by purple cables and its components
are marked with this symbol:
The hybrid powertrain uses a voltage
of 48 V. This system may be hot both
when the ignition is on and after switching it
off.
Comply with the warning messages shown
on the labels.
In the event of an accident with an
airbag deployment
The traction battery is automatically
disconnected from the electrical circuit to
prevent the initiation of short circuits and/
or fires.
In the event of an impact to the vehicle’s
underbody
In these situations, the electrical circuit
or the traction battery can be seriously
damaged.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch
off the ignition.
Move away from the vehicle.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
High-pressure washing
To avoid damaging the electrical
components, it is expressly prohibited to
use high-pressure washing in the engine
compartment or under the body.
Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar
when washing the bodywork.
7
Traction battery
The 48 V Li-ion (Lithium-ion) traction battery
stores the electrical energy needed to propel
the vehicle.
The traction battery is automatically charged
to ensure that the charge level is always around
50% of the maximum level, in order to fully
exploit the hybrid functionality and, at the same
time, always have some capacity available for
the energy recovery operation.
It is located under the front left seat.
The traction battery's range varies depending
on the type of driving, the route and the ageing
of its components.
The traction battery ageing depends
on several factors, such as climatic
conditions and the distance travelled.
To preserve the mileage of your
vehicle and the durability of your
117
Practical information
traction battery, CITROËN recommends that
you:
– Do not expose the vehicle to temperatures
below -30°C and above +60°C for more than
24 hours.
– Do not use a generator to recharge your
vehicle's traction battery.
Vehicle in storage for more than
1 month
Always park the vehicle in a place
with temperatures between -10°C and
+30°C (parking in a place with extreme
temperatures can damage the traction
battery).
Carry out the charging procedure for the
traction battery (48V) via the accessory
battery (12V) and the DC/DC converter.
Refer to the 12 V battery/Accessory
batteries section for the charging the
batteries using a battery charger procedure.
The electric drive system, which operates at a
voltage of approximately 400 V, is identified by
orange cables and its components are marked
with this symbol:
In the event of an accident or impact
to the vehicle’s underbody
In these situations, the electrical circuit or
the traction battery can be seriously
damaged.
Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch
off the ignition.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
An electric vehicle’s power train can
become hot during use and after
switching off the ignition.
Comply with the warning messages shown
on the labels, particularly inside the charging
flap.
When washing
Before washing the vehicle, always
check that the charging flap is closed
correctly.
Never wash the vehicle while the battery is
on charge.
High-pressure washing
To avoid damaging the electrical
components, it is expressly prohibited to
use high-pressure washing in the engine
compartment or under the body.
Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar
when washing the bodywork.
Charging system
(Electric)
400 V electrical system
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on
electrified vehicles.
118
This label is intended solely for use by
firefighters and maintenance services
in the event of any work on the vehicle.
No other person must touch the device
shown on this label.
Never allow water or dust to enter the
connector or charging nozzle - risk of
electrocution or fire!
Never connect / disconnect the charging
nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of
electrocution!
Practical information
Traction battery
This battery stores the energy that powers
the electric motor and the thermal comfort
equipment in the passenger compartment. It is
discharged during use, and must therefore be
regularly recharged. There is no need to wait for
the traction battery to fall to its reserve level
before recharging.
The range of the battery may vary according
to the type of driving, the route, the use of
thermal comfort equipment and the ageing of
its components.
The lifespan of the traction battery
depends on multiple factors, such as
climatic conditions, distance travelled and
how often it has been fast-charged.
To preserve the mileage of your
vehicle and the durability of your
traction battery, CITROËN recommends that
you:
– Do not fully charge the battery of your
electric vehicle daily (charge the traction
battery below 80% as often as possible).
– Do not completely discharge the battery.
– Do not store the vehicle for a long period
of non-use (more than 12 hours) when the
traction battery has a low or high charge
level. Prefer a charge level between 20 and
40%.
– Limit the use of fast charging.
– Do not expose the vehicle to temperatures
below -30°C and above +60°C for more than
24 hours.
– Avoid charging the vehicle at negative
temperatures (except if the vehicle ran more
than 20 minutes) or above +30°C.
– Do not use the vehicle's traction battery as
a generator of energy.
– Do not use a generator to recharge your
vehicle's traction battery.
Charging connectors and
indicator lamps
3. Nozzle locking indicator lamp
Fixed red: nozzle positioned correctly and
locked in the connector.
Flashing red: nozzle incorrectly positioned or
locking not possible.
7
4. Charging indicator lamp
State of charging
indicator lamp
Meaning
Fixed white
Welcome lighting on
opening the flap and
disconnecting the
charging cable.
Flashing white
Charging
initialisation.
Fixed blue
Deferred charging.
Flashing green
Charging.
1. Charging connectors
2. Deferred charging activation button
119
Practical information
State of charging
indicator lamp
Meaning
Fixed green
Charging complete.
The charging
indicator lamp goes
off after about
2 minutes as the
vehicle's functions
go into standby.
The indicator lamp
comes on again
when the vehicle is
unlocked with the
remote control key
or when a door is
opened to indicate
that the battery is
fully charged.
Fixed red
Malfunction.
Identification label
C
C
K
120
In case of impact, even light, against
the charging flap, do not use it.
Do not dismantle or modify the charging
connector - risk of electrocution and/or fire!
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Identification labels on charging
sockets/connectors
Identification labels are affixed to the vehicle,
charging cable and charger to inform the user
about which device needs to be used.
Charging cables, sockets
and chargers
The charging cable supplied with the vehicle
(depending on version) is compatible with the
electrical systems in the country of sale. When
travelling abroad, check the compatibility of
local electrical systems with the charging cable.
A full range of charging cables is available from
your dealer.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for more information and to obtain
suitable charging cables.
The meaning of each identification label is as
follows:
Location
Configuration
Power type/Voltage range
Charging connector (vehicle side)
TYPE 2
AC
< 480 Vrms
Charging socket (charger side)
TYPE 2
AC
< 480 Vrms
Charging connector (vehicle side)
COMBO 2 (FF)
DC
50 V – 500 V
Practical information
Standard charging, mode 2
Domestic socket
(standard charging - alternating current (AC))
Specific domestic charging cable
(mode 2)
You must not damage the cable.
In the event of damage, do not use it and
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to replace it.
Control unit (mode 2)
Mode 2 with a standard socket: 8 A
maximum charging current.
If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Upon plugging the charging cable into a
domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps
come on briefly.
If no indicator lamps come on, check the
domestic socket's circuit-breaker:
– If the circuit-breaker has tripped, contact a
professional to check that the electrical system
is compatible and/or carry out any necessary
repairs.
– If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, stop
using the charging cable and contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
7
Control unit label - Recommendations
Mode 2 with a Green'Up socket: 16 A
maximum charging current.
To have this type of socket installed, call a
professional installer.
Specific domestic charging cable - mode
2 (AC)
Identification label C on the charging
connector (vehicle side).
Refer to the handbook before use.
POWER
Green: electrical connection established;
charging can begin.
CHARGE
Flashing green: charging in progress or
temperature pre-conditioning activated.
Fixed green: charging complete.
FAULT
Red: fault; charging not permitted or
must be stopped immediately. Check that
everything is connected correctly and that the
electrical system is not faulty.
1.
Incorrect use of this charging cable may
result in fire, property damage and serious
injury or death by electrocution!
2.
Always use a correctly earthed power
socket, protected by a 30 mA residual
current device.
3.
Always use an electrical socket protected
by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the
electrical circuit’s current rating.
121
Practical information
4.
The weight of the control unit must not
be borne by the electrical socket, plug and
cables.
5.
Never use this charging cable if it is
defective or in any way damaged.
6.
Never attempt to repair or open this
charging cable. It contains no repairable
parts - replace the charging cable if it is
damaged.
7.
Never immerse this charging cable in water.
8.
Never use this charging cable with an
extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a
conversion adaptor or on a damaged
electrical socket.
POWER
CHARGE
9.
Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a
means of stopping charging.
10. Immediately stop charging, by locking
and then unlocking the vehicle using the
remote control key, if the charging cable or
wall socket feel burning hot to the touch.
14. Do not force the connector if it is locked
into the vehicle.
Control unit label - State of indicator lamps
State of the
indicator lamp
11. This charging cable includes components
liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks.
Do not expose to flammable vapours.
Off
12. Only use this charging cable with CITROËN
vehicles.
On
13. Never plug the cable into the wall socket
(or unplug it) with wet hands.
FAULT
Symbol
Flashing
Description
Not connected to the power supply or power is
not available from the infrastructure.
The control unit is currently performing a
self-test.
(green)
(green)
122
(green)
(red)
Connected only to the infrastructure or to the
infrastructure and to the Electric Vehicle (EV) but
no charging in progress.
Practical information
POWER
(green)
(green)
CHARGE
FAULT
Symbol
Description
7
Connected to the power supply and to the
Electric Vehicle (EV).
The EV is on charge or in a temperature preconditioning sequence.
(green)
Connected to the power supply and to the
Electric Vehicle (EV).
The EV is waiting for charging or the charging of
the EV is completed.
(green)
(red)
Control unit malfunction. No charging allowed.
If an error indicator reappears after a manual
reset, the control unit must be checked by a
CITROËN dealer before the next charge.
The control unit is in diagnostic mode.
(green)
(green)
(red)
Manual reset procedure
The control unit can be reset by simultaneously disconnecting the charging connector and the wall socket.
Then, reconnect the wall socket first. For more information, refer to the handbook.
123
Practical information
Accelerated charging, mode 3
Charging cable, mode 3 (AC)
Accelerated charging unit (depending on
version)
(accelerated charging - single-phase or threephase alternating current (AC))
Superfast charging, mode 4
Fast public charger
(superfast charging - direct current (DC))
In mode 3 with an accelerated charging unit:
32 A maximum charging current.
In mode 3 with an accelerated charging unit
(Wallbox): 32 A maximum charging current.
124
Identification labels C on the charging
connector (vehicle side) and on the socket
(charger side).
Accelerated charging unit
Do not disassemble or modify the
charging unit - Risk of electrocution and/
or fire!
Refer to the charging unit manufacturer's
user manual for the operating instructions.
Charging cable, mode 4 (DC)
(integrated into the fast public charger)
Identification label K on the charging
connector (vehicle side).
Only use fast public chargers where the
cable length does not exceed 30 metres.
Practical information
Charging the traction
battery (Electric)
Principle
For more information, refer to the
General recommendations on
electrified vehicles.
To recharge, connect the vehicle to a domestic
electricity supply (domestic or accelerated
charging) or to a fast public charger (superfast
charging).
For a full charge, follow the desired charging
procedure without pausing it, until it ends
automatically. Charging can be either
immediate or deferred (except fast public
charger, mode 4).
You can stop domestic or accelerated charging
at any time by unlocking the vehicle and
removing the nozzle. For superfast charging,
refer to the fast public charger.
For more information on the charging displays
on the Instrument panel and the Touch
screen, refer to the corresponding section.
It is also possible to monitor the
charging progress using the
MyCitroën App application.
For more information on Remotely
operable additional functions, refer to the
corresponding section.
As a safety measure, the engine will
not start if the charging cable is
plugged into the connector on the vehicle. A
warning is displayed on the instrument
panel.
Cooling the traction battery
The cooling fan in the engine
compartment comes on during charging to
cool the on-board charger and the traction
battery.
Lounge mode
When the vehicle is connected, it is
possible to switch on the ignition and use
certain functions such as the audio and
telematics system and the air conditioning
system for several hours.
Low charging / Driving
Driving when the charge level of
the traction battery is too low can lead to
the vehicle breaking down and can lead to
accidents or serious injuries. ALWAYS make
sure the traction battery has a sufficient
charge level.
Low charging / Parking
If the outside temperature is negative,
it is recommended not to park your vehicle
outside for several hours at a low charging
(less than 20%).
Vehicle in storage for more than
1 month
In the event of a long period of non-use of
the vehicle (beyond 4 weeks) without the
possibility of charging when restarting, the
self-discharge may make it impossible to
restart if the traction battery charge level
is a low or very low, especially at negative
ambient temperatures. ALWAYS make
sure that the traction battery has a charge
between 20% and 40% if you do not plan to
use your vehicle for several weeks.
Do not connect the charging cable.
Always park the vehicle in a place
with temperatures between -10°C and
30°C (parking in a place with extreme
temperatures can damage the traction
battery).
Disconnect the cable from the (+) terminal
of the accessory battery in the engine
compartment.
Connect a 12 V battery charger to the (+) and
(-) terminals of the accessory battery about
every 3 months in order to recharge the
accessory battery and maintain an operating
voltage.
7
Precautions
Our electric vehicles have been developed in
accordance with the recommendations on the
maximum limits for electromagnetic fields,
as issued by the International Commission on
125
Practical information
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP 1998 Guidelines).
Wearers of pacemakers or equivalent
devices
Ask your doctor about what precautions
you should take, or ask the manufacturer
of your implanted electro-medical device about
whether its operation is guaranteed in an
environment which complies with the ICNIRP
recommendations.
If in doubt
Domestic or accelerated charging: do
not remain inside or near the vehicle, or near
the charging cable or charging unit, even for
a short time.
Superfast charging: do not use the system
yourself and avoid approaching public fast
charging points. Leave the area and ask a
third party to recharge the vehicle.
For domestic or accelerated charging
Before charging
Depending on the context:
► Have a professional check that the
electrical system to be used complies with
applicable standards and is compatible with
the vehicle.
► Have a professional electrician install
a dedicated domestic power socket
or accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)
compatible with the vehicle.
126
You should preferably use the charging cable
available as an accessory.
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
During charging
While charging is in progress,
unlocking the vehicle will cause the charging
to stop.
If no action is taken on one of the openings
(door or boot) or on the charging nozzle, the
vehicle will lock again after 30 seconds and
charging will resume automatically.
Never work under the bonnet:
– Some areas remain very hot, even an hour
after charging ends - risk of burns!
– The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts
or strangulation!
After charging
Check that the charging flap is closed.
Do not leave the cable connected to the
domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit
or electrocution in the event of contact with
or immersion in water!
For superfast charging
Before charging
Check that the fast public charging
station and its charging cable are compatible
with the vehicle.
If the exterior temperature is below:
– 0°C, charging times may be extended.
– -20°C, charging is still possible, but
charging times may be extended even
further (the battery has to be heated first).
After charging
Check that the charging flap is closed.
Deferred charging
By default, the deferred charging start time is
set to be around midnight.
Depending on equipment, this time can be
changed.
Settings
The programming of the deferred
charging function is carried out from a
smartphone, via the MyCitroën App
application.
For more information on Remotely
operable additional functions, refer to the
corresponding section.
80% charging is recommended for daily use. It
may improve performance and durability.
Full charging is recommended for a long trip
and will take longer.
Activation
Deferred charging is only possible with
modes 2 and 3.
Practical information
Accelerated charging, mode 3
► After programming the deferred charging,
connect the vehicle to the desired charging
equipment.
► Lock the vehicle.
► Press this button in the flap within one
minute to activate the system (confirmed by
the charging indicator lamp coming on in blue).
Connection
► Before charging, check that the drive
selector is in mode P, otherwise charging is not
possible.
► Open the charging flap by pressing the pushbutton, and check that there are no foreign
bodies on the charging connector.
Domestic charging, mode 2
► Connect the charging cable from the
control unit to the domestic socket.
When the connection is made, all of the
indicator lamps on the control unit light up,
then only the POWER indicator lamp remains
on in green.
► Remove the protective cover from the
charging nozzle.
► Insert the nozzle into the charging
connector.
The start of charging is confirmed by the
flashing green CHARGE indicator lamps in the
flap, then those on the control unit.
If this is not the case, charging has not started;
restart the procedure, ensuring that all
connections are properly established.
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
7
► Follow the accelerated charging unit
(Wallbox) user instructions.
► Remove the protective cover from the
charging nozzle.
► Insert the nozzle into the charging
connector.
The start of charging is confirmed when the
charging indicator lamp in the flap flashes
green.
If this is not the case, charging has not started;
restart the procedure, ensuring that the
connection has been properly established.
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
Superfast charging, mode 4
When charging is complete and while
the charging cable is still connected,
opening the driver's door will display the
charge level on the instrument panel for
about 20 seconds.
► Depending on version, remove the
protective cover from the lower part of the
connector.
127
Practical information
► Follow the instructions for use of the fast
public charger and connect the cable from the
fast public charger to the vehicle's connector.
The start of charging is confirmed by the
flashing green charging indicator lamp in the
flap.
If this is not the case, charging has not started;
restart the procedure, ensuring that the
connection is properly established.
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to
indicate that the nozzle is locked.
Disconnection
When charging is complete, the green
charging indicator lamp in the flap
goes out after about 2 minutes.
Domestic charging, mode 2
The end of charging is confirmed when the
green CHARGE indicator lamp on the control
unit and the green charging indicator lamp in
the flap come on fixed.
► Replace the protective cover on the
charging nozzle and close the charging flap.
► Disconnect the control unit end of the
charging cable from the domestic socket.
Accelerated charging, mode 3
Before disconnecting the nozzle from the
charging connector:
► If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then
unlock it.
► If the vehicle is locked, unlock it.
The red indicator lamp in the charging flap
goes out to confirm that the charging nozzle is
unlocked.
► In modes 2 and 3, remove the charging
nozzle within 30 seconds.
The charging indicator lamp comes on in white.
With selective door unlocking
activated, press the unlocking button
twice to disconnect the charging nozzle.
128
The end of charging is indicated by the
charging control unit and by the fixed lighting
of the green indicator lamp in the flap.
► Hang up the nozzle on the charging unit and
close the charging flap.
Superfast charging, mode 4
The end of charging is indicated by the charger
and by the fixed lighting of the green indicator
lamp in the charging flap.
► You can also stop charging by
pressing this button in the charging flap
(in mode 4 only).
► Hang up the nozzle on the charger.
► Depending on version, replace the
protective cover on the lower section and close
the charging flap.
When the charging nozzle is
disconnected, a message on the
instrument panel indicates that charging is
complete, even if the charging nozzle was
disconnected before full charging was
completed.
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve
traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle
when braking.
Snow chains must be fitted only to the
front wheels.
They must never be fitted to "space-saver"
type spare wheels.
Observe the legislation in force in your
country relating to the use of snow
chains and maximum authorised speeds.
Use only chains designed to be fitted to the
type of wheel fitted to the vehicle:
Original tyre size
Chain type
205/55 R16
Polaire XK9 090
205/50 R17
Polaire XK9 090
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Practical information
Installation tips
► To fit the snow chains during a journey, stop
the vehicle on a flat surface at the side of the
road.
► Apply the parking brake and position any
wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent
movement of the vehicle.
► Fit the snow chains following the
instructions provided by the manufacturer.
► Move off gently and drive for a few
moments, without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h).
► Stop the vehicle and check that the snow
chains are correctly tightened.
It is strongly recommended that you
practise fitting the snow chains on a
level and dry surface before setting off.
Avoid driving with snow chains on
roads that have been cleared of snow
to avoid damaging the vehicle's tyres and
the road surface. If the vehicle is fitted with
alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain
or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
Towing device
Load distribution
► Distribute the load in the trailer so that
the heaviest items are as close as possible to
the axle, and the nose weight approaches the
maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus
reducing engine performance. The maximum
towable load must be reduced by 10% per
1,000 metres of altitude.
Use genuine towing devices and wiring
harnesses approved by CITROËN. We
recommend having them fitted by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
If not fitted by a CITROËN dealer, they must
still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle
manufacturer's instructions.
Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions
are automatically deactivated while an
approved towing system is in use.
Comply with the maximum authorised
towable weight, as indicated on your
vehicle's registration certificate, on the
manufacturer's label and in the Technical
data section of this guide.
If using accessories attached to the
towing device (e.g. bicycle carriers,
tow boxes):
– Comply with the maximum authorised
nose weight.
– Do not transport more than 4 conventional
bicycles or 2 electric bicycles.
When loading bicycles onto a bicycle carrier
on a towball, be sure to place the heaviest
bicycles as close as possible to the vehicle.
Observe the legislation in force in the
country where you are driving.
7
Blanking plug
If your vehicle is equipped with a blanking plug,
it must be removed before towing.
It is located behind the lower air intake grille.
Contact your CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to have it removed.
Roof bars
As a safety measure and to avoid
damaging the roof, it is essential to
use transverse roof bars approved for your
vehicle.
Observe the instructions on fitting and use
contained in the guide supplied with the
roof bars.
Maximum load distributed over the
roof bars, for a loading height not
exceeding 40 cm: 70 kg.
As this value may change, please verify the
maximum load quoted in the guide supplied
with the roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the
speed of the vehicle to the profile of the
road to avoid damaging the roof bars and
the fixings on the vehicle.
129
Practical information
Be sure to refer to national legislation in
order to comply with the regulations for
transporting objects that are longer than the
vehicle.
Recommendations
Distribute the load uniformly, taking
care to avoid overloading one of the sides.
Arrange the heaviest part of the load as
close as possible to the roof.
Secure the load firmly.
Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
susceptible to the effects of side winds and
its stability may be affected.
Regularly check the security and tight
fastening of the roof bars, at least before
each trip.
Remove the roof bars once they are no
longer needed.
Direct fitting on roof
A confirmation message is displayed when
energy economy mode is entered, and the
active functions are placed on standby.
If a telephone call is in progress at the
time, it will be maintained for around
10 minutes via the audio system’s hands-free
system.
Exiting the mode
The transverse bars must only be fixed at the
four anchorage points located on the roof
frame. These points are concealed by the
vehicle doors when the doors are closed.
The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be
inserted into the opening of each anchorage
point.
Energy economy mode
This system manages the duration of use
of certain functions, in order to conserve a
sufficient level of charge in the battery with the
ignition off.
After switching off the engine and for a
maximum cumulative period of around
30 minutes, you can continue to use functions
such as the audio and telematics system,
dipped beam headlamps or courtesy lamps.
130
Selecting the mode
These functions are automatically reactivated
the next time the vehicle is used.
To restore the use of these functions
immediately, start the engine and let it run:
– For less than 10 minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately 5 minutes.
– For more than 10 minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately 30 minutes.
Let the engine run for the specified duration to
ensure that the battery charge is sufficient.
To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or
continuously restarting the engine.
A flat battery prevents the engine
from starting.
For more information on the 12 V battery/
Accessories battery, refer to the
corresponding section.
Practical information
Load reduction mode
This system manages the use of certain
functions according to the level of charge
remaining in the battery.
When the vehicle is being driven, the load
reduction function temporarily deactivates
certain functions, such as the air conditioning
and the heated rear screen.
The deactivated functions are reactivated
automatically as soon as conditions permit.
Bonnet
Stop & Start / e-Auto mode
Before doing anything under the
bonnet, you must switch off the ignition
to avoid any risk of the engine restarting
automatically.
Take care with objects or clothing that could
be caught in the blades of the cooling fan
or in certain moving components - risk of
strangulation and serious injury!
Electric vehicles
Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the cooling
fan or in certain moving components - risk of
strangulation and serious injury!
Before carrying out any work under the
bonnet, you must switch off the ignition,
check that the READY indicator lamp is off
on the instrument panel and disconnect the
nozzle from the charging connector if it is
connected.
The location of the interior bonnet
release lever prevents the bonnet
being opened when the left-hand front door
is closed.
Opening
7
► Open the left-hand front door.
► Pull the interior release lever, located at the
bottom of the door frame, towards you.
When the engine is hot, handle the
exterior safety catch and the bonnet
stay with care (risk of burns), using the
protected area.
When the bonnet is open, take care not to
damage the safety catch.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy
conditions.
Cooling of the engine when stopped
The engine cooling fan may start
after the engine has been switched off.
Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the fan!
► Lift the exterior safety catch and raise the
bonnet.
► Unclip the stay from its housing and place it
in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
131
Practical information
Closing
► Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from
the support slot.
► Clip the stay in its housing.
► Lower the bonnet and release it near the
end of its travel.
► Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked
correctly.
Because of the presence of electrical
equipment under the bonnet, it is
strongly recommended that exposure to
water (rain, washing, etc.) be limited.
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery/Fuses
5. Fusebox
6. Air filter
7. Engine oil filler cap
8. Engine oil dipstick
Electric engine
Petrol engine
1. Screenwash fluid reservoir
2. Engine coolant reservoir (level only)
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Battery/Fuses
5. Fusebox
6. 400 V electrical circuit
7. Emergency circuit-breaker for emergency
services and maintenance technicians
For more information on the Charging system
(Electric), refer to the corresponding section.
132
Check all of the following levels regularly in
accordance with the Manufacturer's service
schedule. Top them up if required, unless
otherwise indicated.
If a level drops significantly, have the
corresponding system checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The fluids must comply with the
Manufacturer's requirements and with
the vehicle's engine.
Take care when working under the
bonnet, as certain areas of the engine
may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the
cooling fan could start at any time (even
with the ignition off).
Engine compartment
The engine shown here is an example for
illustrative purposes only.
The locations of the following components may
vary:
– Air filter.
– Engine oil dipstick.
– Engine oil filler cap.
Checking levels
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or
fluids with the skin.
Most of these fluids are harmful to health
and very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into
sewers or onto the ground.
Empty used oil into the containers reserved
for this purpose at a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Practical information
Engine oil
The level is checked, with the engine
having been switched off for at least 30
minutes and on level ground, either using the
oil level indicator in the instrument panel when
the ignition is switched on (for vehicles
equipped with an electric gauge), or using the
dipstick.
It is normal to top up the oil level between two
services (or oil changes). It is recommended
that you check the level, and top up if
necessary, every 3,000 miles (5,000 km).
In order to maintain the reliability of
the engine and emissions control
system, never use additives in the engine oil.
Checking using the dipstick
For the location of the dipstick, please refer
to the illustration of the corresponding engine
compartment.
► Grasp the dipstick by its coloured grip and
pull it out completely.
► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean,
lint-free cloth.
► Reinsert the dipstick and push fully down,
then pull it out again to visually check the oil
level: the correct level is between marks A
(max) and B (min).
Do not start the engine if the level is:
– above mark A: contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
– below mark B: top up the engine oil
immediately.
► Top up the level if necessary.
► After checking the level, carefully screw the
oil filler cap back on and push the dipstick back
into its tube up to the stop.
Oil grade
Before topping up or changing the
engine oil, check that the oil is suitable
for your engine and complies with the
recommendations in the service schedule
supplied with the vehicle (or available from
your CITROËN dealer or qualified workshop).
Use of non-recommended oil may invalidate
your warranty in the event of engine failure.
The oil level indication displayed on
the instrument panel when the
ignition is switched on is not valid for
30 minutes following an addition of oil.
Topping up the engine oil level
For the location of the engine oil filler cap,
please refer to the corresponding engine
compartment illustration.
Never remove the oil filler cap with the
engine running. Risk of burns and
splashes inside the engine compartment.
► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills
on engine components (risk of fire).
► Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick.
7
The dipstick must be pushed
completely in to prevent oil from
spilling onto the engine. Risk of fire inside
the engine compartment.
Brake fluid
The level of this fluid should be close to
the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake
pads for wear.
To know how often the brake fluid should be
replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing
schedule.
Clean the cap before removing it to
refill. Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a
sealed container.
Engine coolant
For petrol or hybrid versions
It is normal to top up this fluid between
two services.
133
Practical information
The check and top-up must only be done with
the engine cold.
A level of coolant that is too low risks causing
major damage to the engine; the coolant level
must be close to the "MAX" mark without ever
going above it.
If the level is close to or below the "MIN" mark,
it is essential to top it up.
When the engine is hot, the temperature of the
coolant is regulated by the fan.
As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at
least one hour after switching off the engine
before carrying out any work.
In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need
to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around
the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to
allow the pressure to drop.
Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap
and top up to the required level.
For electric versions
Do not top up the coolant.
Cooling of the engine when stopped
The engine cooling fan may start
after the engine has been switched off.
Take care with objects or clothing that
could be caught in the blades of the fan!
Screenwash fluid
Top up to the required level when
necessary.
Fluid specification
The fluid must be topped up with a pre-mixed
product.
In winter (temperatures below zero), a fluid
containing an anti-freeze agent which is
appropriate for the temperature conditions
must be used in order to protect the system's
components (pump, tank, ducts, jets).
Filling with pure water is prohibited in
all circumstances (risk of freezing,
limescale, etc.).
Checks
If the level is close to or below
the "MIN" mark, it is essential to contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
134
Unless otherwise indicated, check these
components in accordance with the
Manufacturer's service schedule and according
to your engine.
Otherwise, have them checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Only use products recommended by
CITROËN or products of equivalent
quality and specification.
In order to optimise the operation of
components as important as those in the
braking system, CITROËN selects and offers
very specific products.
12 V battery
The battery does not require any
maintenance.
Check regularly that the terminals are correctly
tightened (versions without quick-release
terminals) and that the connections are clean.
For more information on the
precautions to take before any work
on the 12 V battery, refer to the
corresponding section.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start
are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery
with special technology and specifications.
Its replacement should be carried out only
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Passenger compartment
filter
Depending on the environment and the
use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty
Practical information
atmosphere, city driving), change it twice as
often, if necessary.
A clogged passenger compartment
filter can adversely affect air
conditioning system performance and
generate undesirable odours.
Air filter
Depending on the environment and the
use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty
atmosphere, city driving), change it twice as
often, if necessary.
Oil filter
Change the oil filter each time the
engine oil is changed.
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any
maintenance (no oil change).
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style of
driving, particularly in the case of
vehicles used in town, over short distances. It
may be necessary to have the condition of the
brakes checked, even between vehicle services.
Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the
brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads
are worn.
After washing the vehicle, moisture, or
in wintry conditions, ice can form on
the brake discs and pads: braking efficiency
may be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to
dry and defrost them.
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake disc
wear, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Manual parking brake
If you notice excessive brake lever travel
or decreased effectiveness, the parking
brake must be adjusted, even between two
services.
This system must be checked by a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Electric parking brake
This system does not require any routine
servicing. However, in the event of a
problem, do not hesitate to have the system
checked by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
For more information on the Electric
parking brake, refer to the
corresponding section.
Wheels and tyres
The inflation pressure of all tyres,
including the spare wheel, must be
checked on "cold" tyres.
The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure
label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven
for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles
(10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add
0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the
label.
7
Under-inflation increases energy
consumption. Non-compliant tyre
pressures cause tyres to wear prematurely
and have an adverse effect on the vehicle's
road holding - risk of accident!
Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces
the braking and road holding performance of
the vehicle. Regularly check the condition of
the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and rims as well
as the presence of the valve caps.
When the wear indicators no longer appear set
back from the tread, the depth of the grooves
is less than 1.6 mm; replace the tyres as soon as
possible.
Using different size wheels and tyres from
those specified can affect the lifetime of
tyres, wheel rotation, ground clearance, the
speedometer reading and have an adverse
effect on road holding.
Fitting different tyres on the front and rear
axles can cause the ESC to mistime.
135
Practical information
Always mark the direction of rotation on the
tyres that will be stored when fitting winter or
summer tyres. Store them in a cool, dry place
and away from direct exposure to the sun's rays.
Winter or 4-seasons tyres can be
identified by this symbol on their
sidewalls.
Timing and accessory kits
The timing and accessory kits are used
from the time the engine is started until
it is switched off. It is normal for them to wear
over time.
A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage
the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the
recommended replacement frequency, stated
in distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever
is reached first.
Free-wheeling
In certain situations, it is necessary to put the
vehicle into free-wheeling mode (e.g. towing, on
a rolling road, automatic car wash (Wash mode),
rail or sea transport).
The procedure varies according to the type of
gearbox and parking brake.
Never leave the vehicle unattended
with the vehicle into free-wheeling
mode.
136
When the vehicle is fitted with an
automatic gearbox or a drive selector,
it is strongly recommended to stay inside
the vehicle when it is in free-wheeling mode.
With manual or EAT6
automatic gearbox and
manual parking brake
/
/
To release them
► With the vehicle stationary and engine
running, depress the brake pedal.
► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever
into neutral.
► With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
selector to mode N.
► Release the parking brake.
► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the
engine.
Reverting to normal operation
► Apply the parking brake.
► With an automatic gearbox, place the gear
selector to mode P.
With e-DCS6 automatic
gearbox or drive selector
and electric parking brake
/
Release procedure
With the vehicle stationary and the engine
running:
► Depress and hold the brake pedal.
► Select and hold the mode N on the push
selector.
► Press the START/STOP button around 1 s to
switch off the engine (confirmed by the flashing
of the P and N indicator lights).
► Release the brake pedal to switch on the
ignition and deactivate the electric parking
brake.
A message is displayed on the
instrument panel to confirm the
unlocking of the wheels for 15 minutes.
When the vehicle is free-wheeling, the
audio system cannot be updated (message
displayed on the instrument panel).
After 15 minutes or reverting to normal
operation
► While depressing the brake pedal, restart
the engine and select mode P.
Practical information
Advice on care and
maintenance
General recommendations
Observe the following recommendations to
avoid damaging the vehicle.
Exterior
Never use a high-pressure jet wash in
the engine compartment - risk of
damaging the electrical components!
Do not wash the vehicle in bright sunshine
or extremely cold conditions.
When washing the vehicle in an
automatic roller-brush car wash, be
sure to lock the doors and, depending on
version, move the electronic key away.
When using a pressure washer, keep the jet
nozzle at a minimum distance of 30 cm from
the vehicle (particularly when cleaning areas
containing chipped paint, sensors or seals,
plastic parts).
Promptly clean up any stains containing
chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's
paintwork (including tree resin, bird
droppings, insect secretions, pollen and tar).
Depending on the environment, clean the
vehicle frequently to remove salty deposits
(in coastal areas), soot (in industrial areas)
and mud/salts (in wet or cold areas). These
substances can be highly corrosive.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for advice on removing stubborn
stains requiring special products (such as tar
or insect removers).
Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed
by a CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
Interior
When washing the vehicle, never use a
water hose or high-pressure jet to
clean the interior.
Liquids carried in cups or other open
containers can spill, presenting a risk of
damage to the instruments and controls and
the controls located on the centre console.
Be vigilant!
To clean instrument panels, touch screens
or other displays, wipe gently with a soft,
dry cloth. Do not use products (e.g. alcohol,
disinfectant) or soapy water directly on
these surfaces - risk of damage!
Bodywork
High-gloss paint
7
Do not use abrasive products, solvents,
petrol or oil to clean the bodywork.
Never use an abrasive sponge to clean
stubborn stains - risk of scratching the
paintwork!
Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to
plastic or rubber parts.
Use a soft cloth and soapy water or a
pH neutral product.
Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean
microfibre cloth.
Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry.
Comply with the instructions for use stated
on the product.
Decals
(Depending on version)
Do not use a high-pressure washer to
clean the vehicle - risk of damaging or
detaching the decals!
Use a high-flow hose (temperature
between 25°C and 40°C).
Place the jet of water perpendicular to the
surface to be cleaned.
Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.
137
Practical information
Textile
The dashboard, door panels and seats may
contain parts made of textile material.
Maintenance
Do not use aggressive cleaning
products (e.g. alcohol, solvent or
ammonia).
Do not use steam-cleaning systems - risk of
affecting the adhesion of the fabrics!
Remove dust from the textile parts
regularly with a dry cloth, soft brush or
vacuum cleaner.
Rub down the textile parts once per year
with a clean, damp cloth. After leaving
overnight to dry, brush with a soft-bristled
brush.
Stain removal
Do not rub the stain or it may spread
or you may cause the substance to
penetrate the surface.
Act quickly by reducing the stain from
its edges inwards.
Remove as much substance or solids as
possible using a spoon or spatula, and
remove as much liquid as possible using
absorbent paper.
138
Product/Procedure to use depending
on the type of stain:
– Grease, oil and ink: clean with a pH-neutral
detergent.
– Vomit: clean with sparkling mineral water.
– Blood: spread flour over the stain and
allow to dry; remove with a slightly damp
cloth.
– Mud: allow to dry and then remove with a
slightly damp cloth.
– Cake, chocolate, ice cream: clean with
lukewarm water.
– Sugary and/or alcoholic drinks: clean with
lukewarm water, or lemon juice if the stain is
persistent.
– Hair gel, coffee, tomato sauce, vinegar:
clean with lukewarm water and lemon juice.
For solid substances, then use a soft brush or
vacuum cleaner.
For liquid substances, then use a damp
microfibre cloth and then dry with another
cloth.
Leather
Leather is a natural product. Appropriate
regular care is essential for its durability.
It must be protected and nourished using a
specific leather product, to keep it supple and
preserve its original appearance.
Do not use maintenance products
which are not suitable for
cleaning leather (e.g. solvent, detergent,
petrol, pure alcohol).
Do not use bleaching or colour-removal
products (e.g. perchloroethylene).
When cleaning items partly made from
leather, take care not to damage the other
materials with the specific leather product.
Before cleaning greasy stains or
liquids, quickly mop up any surplus.
Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable
to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has
been dampened with demineralised water
and thoroughly wrung out.
Clean the leather, without rubbing too
vigorously, using a soft cloth moistened with
soapy water or a pH-neutral product.
Dry with a soft, dry cloth.
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle
Tool kit
This reflective and dismantable device is to be
installed on the side of the road when a vehicle
is broken down or damaged.
Set of tools supplied with the vehicle.
Its content depends on your vehicle's
equipment:
– Temporary puncture repair kit.
– Spare wheel.
Before getting out of the vehicle
Turn on the hazard warning lamps,
then put on the safety vest to assemble and
install the triangle.
Assembling and placing the
triangle
List of tools
8
These tools are specific to the vehicle
and may vary according to the level of
equipment.
Do not use them for any other purpose.
Access to the tools
The tool kit is stored in the boot.
1. Chocks to immobilise the vehicle
(depending on equipment)
2. Socket for the security bolts (depending on
equipment)
To adapt the wheelbrace to the special
‘security’ bolts.
3. Removable towing eye
For more information on Towing the vehicle
and using the removable towing eye, refer to
the corresponding section.
For versions supplied with a triangle as original
equipment, refer to the illustration above.
For other versions, refer to the assembly
instructions provided with the triangle.
► Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle,
as required by local legislation.
139
In the event of a breakdown
With temporary puncture repair kit
6. Jack with integrated handle
To raise the vehicle.
7. Wheel bolt cap removal tool (depending on
equipment)
For removing the wheel bolt head finishers
on alloy wheels.
Temporary puncture
repair kit
Visit this link to view explanatory
videos: http://q-r.to/bagGl9
For more information on the Spare wheel, refer
to the corresponding section.
4. 12 V compressor with cartridge of sealant
and speed limit sticker
For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust
the tyre pressure.
For more information on the Temporary
puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding
section.
With spare wheel
5. Wheelbrace
For removing the wheel bolts.
140
The jack must only be used to change
a wheel with a damaged or punctured
tyre.
Do not use any jack other than the one
supplied with the vehicle.
If the vehicle does not have its original jack,
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain the one that was
intended by the manufacturer.
The jack meets European standards,
as defined in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/CE, and also complies with UKCA
requirement, as defined by the Supply
of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008
No.1597.
The jack does not require any maintenance.
Made up of a compressor and a sealant
cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary
repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the
nearest garage.
It is designed to repair most punctures located
on the tyre tread.
The vehicle's electric system allows
the connection of the compressor to
the 12 V power supply for long enough to
repair a tyre after a puncture.
For more information on the Tool kit,
refer to the corresponding section.
In the event of a breakdown
Tyre inflation pressures are indicated
on this label.
For more information on Identification
markings, particularly this label, refer to the
corresponding section.
► Check that the compressor switch is in
position "O".
► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under
the compressor.
► Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
8
► Affix the speed limit sticker.
Should the pressure of one or more
tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to
reinitialise the under-inflation detection
system.
For more information on Tyre underinflation detection, refer to the
corresponding section.
Repair procedure
► Remove the transparent cap from the bottle
of sealant.
► Lift the protective cover before installing
the bottle of sealant on the compressor.
► Turn the bottle of sealant over and screw it
a quarter turn into the compressor.
► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be
repaired, and place it in a clean place.
The speed limit sticker must be affixed
inside the vehicle in the area close to
the driver, to remind them that a wheel is in
temporary use.
► Switch the ignition on.
Do not remove any foreign body
(e.g. nail, screw) which has penetrated
the tyre.
► Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic
and apply the parking brake.
► Follow the safety instructions (hazard
warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility
jacket, etc.) according to the legislation in force
in the country in which you are driving.
► Switch the ignition off.
► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
compressor.
► Connect the pipe from the compressor to
the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten
firmly.
► Switch on the compressor by moving the
switch to position "I" until the tyre pressure
reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected
under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect
the pipe from the valve during this operation
(risk of blowback).
If after approximately 7 minutes, the
pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this
indicates that the tyre is not repairable;
141
In the event of a breakdown
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
► Move the switch to position "O".
► Disconnect the compressor's electric plug
from the vehicle's 12 V socket.
► Remove the kit.
► Refit the cap on the valve.
► Remove and store the bottle of sealant.
The sealant product is harmful if
swallowed and causes irritation to the
eyes.
Keep this product out of the reach of
children.
The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the
bottle.
After use, do not discard the bottle into the
environment; take it to a CITROËN dealer or
an authorised waste disposal site.
Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of
sealant, available from a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
► Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles
(5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between
12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the
puncture.
► Stop to check the repair and the tyre
pressure using the kit:
• If the tyre pressure is incorrect, contact a
CITROËN dealer to have the tyre changed.
• If the tyre pressure is correct, drive a
second time for approximately 3 miles
(5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between
12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), stop then
check again the tyre pressure using the kit
to confirm the effective repair of the tyre.
► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten
firmly.
► Check that the compressor switch is in
position "O".
► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under
the compressor.
► Connect the compressor's electric plug to
the vehicle's 12 V socket.
► Switch the ignition on.
► Start the compressor by placing the switch
at position "I" and adjust the pressure to the
value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label.
To deflate: press the black button located on
the compressor pipe, near the valve connection.
With a tyre repaired using this type of
kit, do not exceed a speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not drive more than
125 miles (200 km).
You must contact a CITROËN dealer or
a qualified workshop to have the repair
checked and the tyre changed.
If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar
is not reached, the tyre is damaged;
contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop for assistance.
Checking/adjusting tyre
pressures
The compressor can be used, without injecting
sealant, to check and, if necessary, adjust the
tyre pressures.
► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and
keep it in a clean place.
► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the
compressor.
142
► Once the correct pressure is reached, put
the switch in position "O".
► Remove the kit and stow it.
► Refit the cap on the valve.
In the event of a breakdown
Spare wheel
Visit this link to view explanatory
videos: http://q-r.to/bagGl9
► Slacken the central nut.
► Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt).
► Lift the spare wheel towards you from the
rear.
► Take the wheel out of the boot.
If there is no wheel in the well, the
fastening device (nut and bolt) cannot
be refitted.
Accessing the spare wheel
The spare wheel is stored in the boot, under
the floor.
To access the spare wheel, first refer to the
Tool kit section.
Depending on version, the spare wheel
may be a standard steel or 'spacesaver' wheel.
Removing the spare wheel
► Unclip the tool storage box (standard spare
wheel).
Wheel with wheel trim
When removing the wheel, first
remove the wheel trim by pulling with both
hands on one of the upper arms.
When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel
trim, starting by placing its aperture in line
with the valve and then pushing it into place
all round its edge with the palm of your
hand.
8
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does
not obstruct traffic: the ground must be
level, stable and non-slippery.
With a manual gearbox, engage first gear
to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,
unless it is set to automatic mode, and
switch off the ignition.
With an automatic gearbox, select mode P
to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake,
unless it is set to automatic mode, and
switch off the ignition.
Check that the parking brake indicator lamps
on the instrument panel are on fixed.
The occupants must get out of the vehicle
and wait where they are safe.
If necessary, place a chock under the
wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be
changed.
Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a
jack; use an axle stand.
► If the vehicle has steel wheels, remove the
wheel trim.
► To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of
the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels).
► Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to
slacken the security bolt.
► Slacken the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
143
In the event of a breakdown
Never use an impact wrench on the
security bolt socket.
► Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and
ensure that it is directly below the front A
or rear B jacking point on the underbody,
whichever is closest to the wheel to be
changed.
► Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient
space between the wheel and the ground to
easily admit the spare (not punctured) wheel.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the
ground is slippery or loose, the jack
may slip or collapse - risk of injury!
Take care to position the jack strictly at
one of the jacking points A or B under the
vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack
is centred under the contact area on the
vehicle. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage
to the vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing risk of injury!
144
Fitting a wheel
Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type
spare wheel
If the vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, the
washers A do not make contact with the
steel or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The
wheel is held in place by the conical contact
surface B of each bolt.
► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean
place.
► Remove the wheel.
► Extend jack 6 until its head comes into
contact with jacking point A or B; contact
area A or B on the vehicle must be properly
inserted into the central part of the head of the
jack.
► In the case of a "space saver" type
spare wheel, the damaged wheel cannot be
stowed under the floor. It must be placed in
the boot; use a cover to protect the inside of
the boot.
Stowing the damaged wheel
► To stow an alloy wheel, first
remove the wheel trim from the centre of
the wheel so that the fastening device (nut
and bolt) can be put in place.
In the event of a breakdown
► Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns.
► Position the fastening device (nut and bolt)
in the middle of the wheel.
► Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain
the wheel correctly.
► Depending on version, put the tool box back
in place in the middle of the wheel and clip it
in place.
► Fit the wheel on the hub.
► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible.
► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security
socket 2.
► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
► Tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security
socket 2.
► Tighten the other bolts using the
wheelbrace 5 only.
► Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts
(depending on equipment).
► Store the tools.
Putting the spare wheel
back in place
► Lower the vehicle again fully.
► Fold jack 6 and remove it.
► Put the spare wheel back in place in its
housing.
8
After changing a wheel
With a non-standard or 'space-saver'
spare wheel
Deactivate certain driving aid functions
(Active Safety Brake, etc.).
Do not exceed the maximum authorised
speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) or the maximum
distance of 50 miles (80 km).
Driving with more than one spare wheel of
this type is prohibited.
The wheel trim from the replaced wheel
must not be refitted.
Go to a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
Have the tightening of the spare wheel's
bolts and its tyre pressure checked.
145
In the event of a breakdown
Have the punctured tyre examined. After
inspection, the technician will advise you on
whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must
be replaced.
Changing a bulb
In some weather conditions (e.g. low
temperature or humidity), misting on
the internal surface of the glass of the
headlamps and rear lamps is normal, and will
disappear after the lamps have been on for a
few minutes.
The headlamps have polycarbonate
lenses with a protective coating:
– Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive
cloth, nor with detergent or solvent
products.
– Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH
neutral product.
– When using a high-pressure washer on
persistent marks, do not keep the lance
directed towards the headlamps, lamps or
their edges for too long, so as not to damage
their protective coating and seals.
Changing a bulb must only be done
with the ignition off and after the
146
headlamp / lamp has been switched off for
several minutes - risk of serious burns!
Do not touch the bulb directly with your
fingers; use a lint-free cloth.
It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet
(UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the
headlamp.
Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb
of the same type and specification. To avoid
lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs.
Refitting the lamp units
Perform the operations in the reverse
order to dismantling.
Opening the bonnet/Accessing the
bulbs
Proceed with caution when the engine is hot
- risk of burns!
Take care with objects or clothing that could
be caught in the blades of the cooling fan risk of strangulation!
Halogen bulbs (Hx)
To ensure good quality lighting, check
that the bulb is correctly positioned in its
housing.
Light-emitting diode (LED)
headlamps and lamps
Depending on version, the affected types of
headlamps/lamps are:
– LED technology headlamps.
– Offset daytime running lamps.
– Dipped beam headlamps.
– Main beam headlamps.
– Direction indicator side repeaters.
– Brake lamps.
– Third brake lamp.
– Number plate lamps.
If you need to replace this type of
bulb, you must contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Do not touch the Full LED technology
headlamps or lamps - risk of electrocution!
Never look too closely at the light
beam of LED technology lamps - risk of
serious eye injury!
In the event of a breakdown
Front lamps
Foglamps
Model with LED technology
headlamps
► Turn the connector a quarter turn
anti-clockwise.
► Pull the bulb connector.
► Remove the bulb and replace it.
1. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps (LED)
2. Daytime running lamps/Sidelamps (LED)
3. Direction indicators (PY21W)
4. Dipped beam headlamps (HP)
Amber-coloured bulbs must be
replaced by bulbs with identical
specifications and colour.
8
► Unclip the wheel arch trim.
► Turn the steering wheel so that the front of
the wheel is pointing to the outside.
► Unscrew three Torx T20 screws (side)
and two hex M10 screws (bottom) from the
mudguard to have access to fog lamp.
5. Main beam headlamps (LED)
6. Foglamps (H11-55W)
Direction indicators
Rapid flashing of the indicator lamp for
a direction indicator (left or right)
indicates that one of the bulbs on the
corresponding side has failed.
► Disconnect the front fog lamp connector.
► With a quarter turn into counterclockwise,
remove the bulb holder from the front fog lamp.
147
In the event of a breakdown
► Remove the bulb and replace it.
Rear lamps
To replace this type of bulb, you can
also contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Integrated direction indicator side
repeaters
► Insert a flat screwdriver between the door
mirror and its base.
► Tilt the screwdriver and use it as a lever to
extract the mirror.
► Unclip the shell of the door mirror by
pressing on the two retaining clips.
► Press the central tab and remove the side
repeater.
► Pull out the bulb holder and replace the
faulty bulb.
For the replacement of these bulbs,
you can also contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
148
A standard pair of pliers or the wheelbrace
(depending on equipment) may be necessary to
remove the nut.
► Remove the retaining tabs from the bulb
holder and remove it.
► Turn the bulb a quarter turn and replace it.
Make sure to engage the lamp unit in
its guides while keeping it in line with
the vehicle.
Tighten sufficiently to ensure sealing, but
without damaging the lamp unit.
1. Brake lamps (P21-5W / LED) / Sidelamps (5W)
2. Sidelamps (W5W / LED)
3. Direction indicators (PY21W)
4. Reversing lamps (P21W)
5. Foglamp (LED)
Changing bulbs
These bulbs are changed from inside the boot.
► Open the boot.
► Remove the access flap on the
corresponding side trim.
► Disconnect the lamp unit connector.
► Unscrew the nut and remove it. Be careful
not to drop it inside the wing.
► Unclip the lamp unit and carefully extract it,
pulling it straight towards the outside.
Interior lighting
Courtesy lamp (W5W)
► Using a thin, flap tip screwdriver, unclip the
entire console surrounding the courtesy lamp.
► Remove the defective bulb and replace it.
► Fit the console back into place around the
courtesy lamp and clip it correctly.
Boot (W5W)
► Unclip the unit by pushing the base from
behind.
► Pull the bulb out and replace it.
► Put the unit back in place.
In the event of a breakdown
Fuses
Changing a fuse
All work must be carried out only by a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
The replacement of a fuse by a third party
could cause a serious malfunction of the
vehicle.
Installing electrical accessories
The vehicle's electrical system is
designed to operate with standard or
optional equipment.
Before fitting other electrical equipment
or accessories to your vehicle, contact a
CITROËN dealer or a qualified workshop.
CITROËN accepts no responsibility for
the cost incurred in repairing the
vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions
resulting from the installation of accessories
not supplied or not recommended by
CITROËN and not installed in accordance
with its recommendations, in particular
when the combined power consumption of
all of the additional equipment connected
exceeds 10 milliamperes.
12 V battery / Accessory
battery
Lead-acid starter batteries
These batteries contain harmful
substances (sulphuric acid and lead).
They must be disposed of in accordance
with regulations and must never under any
circumstances be discarded with household
waste.
Dispose of used batteries at a designated
collection point.
Protect your eyes and face before
handling the battery.
All operations on the battery must be carried
out in a well ventilated area and away from
naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid
any risk of explosion or fire.
Wash your hands afterwards.
Electronic control units/LED
technology headlamps
Never connect the negative jump lead to the
metal part of the electronic control units or
at the back of the headlamps.
Risk of destroying the electronic control
units and/or headlamps!
Connect to the remote earth point provided
for this purpose.
Frozen battery
Never try to charge a frozen battery risk of explosion!
If the battery has frozen, have it checked by
a CITROËN dealer or by a qualified workshop,
who will verify that the internal components
have not been damaged and that the case
has not cracked, which could lead to a risk of
leakage of toxic and corrosive acid.
8
Automatic gearbox
Never try to start the engine by
pushing the vehicle.
Electric vehicles
Flat accessory battery
It is no longer possible to start the
motor or recharge the traction battery.
Precautions before working on the
accessory battery
Select mode P, switch off the ignition, check
that the instrument panel is off and that the
vehicle is not being charged.
Jump-starting another vehicle
Do not use the accessory battery
to jump-start another vehicle or to charge
another vehicle's battery.
149
In the event of a breakdown
Symbols
No sparks or naked flames, no smoking.
Always protect your eyes. Explosive
gases can cause blindness and injury.
Keep the vehicle's battery out of the
reach of children.
The vehicle's battery contains sulphuric
acid which can make you go blind or
cause severe burns.
For more information, refer to the
handbook.
Explosive gases can be present close to
the battery.
For petrol versions
Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or for charging a discharged battery.
Accessing the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
For access to the (+) terminal:
► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal
release lever, then the external safety catch.
► Raise the bonnet.
150
(+) Positive terminal with a quick-release
terminal.
(-) Negative terminal.
Starting using another battery
If the vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be
started using a backup battery (either external
or from another vehicle) and jump leads or
using a battery booster.
Never start the engine by connecting
a battery charger.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster.
Check beforehand that the backup battery
has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.
The two vehicles must not be in contact
with each other.
Switch off all electricity-consuming
equipment on both vehicles (audio system,
wipers, lighting, etc.).
Make sure that the jump leads are well away
from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt,
etc.).
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the
engine is running.
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of
flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the
(+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the
booster.
► Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B
or of the booster (or to an earth point on the
assisting vehicle).
► Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the (-) terminal of flat battery A.
► Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and
leave it running for a few minutes.
► Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch
off the ignition and wait a few moments before
trying again.
► Wait for it to return to idle.
► Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order.
► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
► Allow the engine to run for at least
30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so
In the event of a breakdown
that the battery reaches an adequate state of
charge.
Driving immediately without having
reached a sufficient level of charge
may affect some of the vehicle's functions
(e.g. Stop & Start).
► Switch the ignition off.
► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
To charge the vehicle's battery
yourself, use only a charger compatible
with lead-acid batteries with a nominal
voltage of 12 V.
Follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
Never reverse polarities.
8
24V
12V
Charging the battery using a battery
charger
For optimum service life of the battery, it is
essential to maintain an adequate state of
charge.
In some circumstances, it may be necessary to
charge the battery:
– When using the vehicle mainly for short
journeys.
– If the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks.
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
If this label is present, use only a 12 V
charger to avoid causing irreversible
damage to the electrical components.
► Switch off charger B before connecting
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.
► Ensure that the charger cables are in good
condition.
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
► Connect the cables of charger B as follows:
• the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal
of battery A.
• the negative (-) black cable to the (-)
terminal of battery A.
► At the end of the charging operation, switch
off charger B before disconnecting the cables
from battery A.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the 12 V
battery
In order to maintain an adequate state of
charge for starting the engine, we recommend
disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be
unused for an extended period.
Before disconnecting the 12 V battery:
► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
roof).
► Close all openings (doors, tailgate, windows).
► Switch off all electricity-consuming devices
(audio system, wipers, lamps, etc.).
► Switch off the ignition and wait for
4 minutes.
After accessing the 12 V battery, it is only
necessary to disconnect the (+) terminal.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
151
In the event of a breakdown
Quick-release terminal clamp
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
► Push clamp B fully down.
► Lower lever A to lock clamp B.
► Depending on equipment, lower the plastic
cover on the (+) terminal.
Do not force the lever when pressing
on it, as if the clamp is not positioned
correctly, locking will then not be possible.
Start the procedure again.
► Depending on equipment, lift the plastic
cover on the (+) terminal.
► Raise lever A fully to release clamp B.
► Remove clamp B by lifting it off.
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
The Stop & Start system may not be
operational during the trip following
the first engine start.
In this case, the system will only be available
again after a continuous period with the
vehicle immobilised, the duration of which
depends on the exterior temperature and
the state of charge of the battery (up to
about 8 hours).
For hybrid versions
► Raise lever A fully.
► Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal.
152
Procedure for starting the engine using another
battery or for charging a discharged battery
(12 V or 48 V).
► Access to the 12 V battery.
For more information on Accessing the
battery, refer to the corresponding section.
► If necessary, perform the 12 V battery
disconnection/reconnection procedure.
For more information on Disconnecting/
Reconnecting the battery, refer to the
corresponding section.
► After reconnecting the 12 V battery,
perform the automatic reset procedures of the
electronic systems and manual reset of some
equipment.
For more information on Following
reconnection, refer to the corresponding
section.
Accessing the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet.
For access to the (+) terminal:
► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal
release lever, then the external safety catch.
► Raise the bonnet.
(+) Positive terminal with a quick-release
terminal.
(-) Negative terminal.
Starting using another battery
The hybrid system starts the vehicle,
but a 12 V supply is required. There are
several reasons why the vehicle cannot be
started.
In the event of a breakdown
If the 12 V battery is flat, the 12 V power supply
can be ensured using a backup battery (either
external or from another vehicle) and jump
leads or using a battery booster or using a
battery charger.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery
booster.
Check beforehand that the backup battery
has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity
at least equal to that of the discharged
battery.
The two vehicles must not be in contact
with each other.
Switch off all electricity-consuming
equipment on both vehicles (audio system,
wipers, lighting, etc.).
Make sure that the jump leads are well away
from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt,
etc.).
Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the
engine is running.
► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of
flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the
(+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the
booster.
► Connect one end of the green or black
cable to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B
or of the booster (or to an earth point on the
assisting vehicle).
► Connect the other end of the green or black
cable to the (-) terminal of flat battery A.
► Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and
leave it running for a few minutes.
► Operate the starter on the broken down
vehicle and let the engine run.
If the engine does not start immediately, switch
off the ignition and wait a few moments before
trying again.
► Wait for it to return to idle.
► Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order.
► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
► Allow the engine to run for at least
20 minutes, with the vehicle stationary (in
a ventilated area to avoid accumulation of
exhaust gases), so that the battery reaches an
adequate state of charge.
Driving immediately without having
reached a sufficient level of charge
may affect some of the vehicle's functions
(e.g. e-Auto mode).
Charging the 12 V battery using a
battery charger
8
For optimum service life of the battery, it is
essential to maintain an adequate state of
charge.
In some circumstances, it may be necessary to
charge the battery (e.g. if the vehicle is to be
taken off the road for several weeks)
Consult a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop.
The hybrid system is connected to the
12 V network through the DC/DC
converter. Any operation may affect the
overall behaviour of the system.
To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, use
only a charger compatible with lead-acid
batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
Follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
Never reverse polarities.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
► Switch the ignition off.
► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
153
In the event of a breakdown
Do not try to charge the hybrid
system directly.
The hybrid system is connected to the 12 V
network through the DC/DC converter. Any
operation may affect the overall behaviour of
the system.
► Switch off charger B before connecting
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.
► Ensure that the charger cables are in good
condition.
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
► Connect the cables of charger B as follows:
• the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal
of battery A.
• the negative (-) black cable to the (-)
terminal of battery A.
► At the end of the charging operation, switch
off charger B before disconnecting the cables
from battery A.
Charging the 48 V battery using a 12 V
battery charger
If the start fails, refer to the paragraph
"Starting using another battery" and follow
the recommended procedure.
In case of failure, especially after long storage,
the 48 V battery may be discharged and require
a charging process.
154
Only use a specific 12 V battery
charger capable of maintaining 13.5 V
with a high level of current 40-50 A (approx.
600 W).
To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, use
only a charger compatible with lead-acid
batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.
Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster.
Follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the charger.
Never reverse polarities.
It is not necessary to disconnect the
battery.
► Switch the ignition off.
► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
► Switch off charger B before connecting the
cables to the 12 V battery, so as to avoid any
dangerous sparks.
► Ensure that the charger cables are in good
condition.
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
► Connect the cables of charger B as follows:
• the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal
of battery A,
• the negative (-) black cable to earth point C
on the vehicle.
► Open the driver's door and turn the ignition
on without pressing the brake pedal (to wake
up the vehicle).
The hybrid system will automatically start
charging the 48 V battery after 1 minute with
a 12 V power supply higher than 13.5 V. The
current supplied by the battery charger should
be about 30-50A.
When the appropriate energy level is reached
in the 48 V battery (between 30 to 40 minutes
depending on 12 V battery state of charge), the
hybrid system automatically stops the charging
process of the 48 V battery.
In the event of a breakdown
► At the end of the charging operation, switch
off charger B before disconnecting the cables
from 12 V battery A.
► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if
the vehicle has one.
► Operate the starter on the vehicle and let
the engine run.
► Wait for it to return to idle.
► Allow the engine to run for at least
20 minutes, with the vehicle stationary (in
a ventilated area to avoid accumulation of
exhaust gases), so that the 48 V battery reaches
an adequate state of charge.
Disconnecting/Reconnecting the 12 V
battery
In order to maintain an adequate state of
charge for starting the engine, we recommend
disconnecting the battery if the vehicle is to be
unused for an extended period.
Before disconnecting the 12 V battery:
► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
roof).
► Close all openings (doors, tailgate, windows).
► Switch off all electricity-consuming devices
(audio system, wipers, lamps, etc.).
► Switch off the ignition and wait for
4 minutes.
After accessing the 12 V battery, it is only
necessary to disconnect the (+) terminal.
Quick-release terminal clamp
Disconnecting the (+) terminal
► Push clamp B fully down.
► Lower lever A to lock clamp B.
► Depending on equipment, lower the plastic
cover on the (+) terminal.
8
Do not force the lever when pressing
on it, as if the clamp is not positioned
correctly, locking will then not be possible.
Start the procedure again.
Following reconnection
► Depending on equipment, lift the plastic
cover on the (+) terminal.
► Raise lever A fully to release clamp B.
► Remove clamp B by lifting it off.
Reconnecting the (+) terminal
After reconnecting the battery, turn on the
ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the
engine, to enable the electronic systems to
initialise.
If minor problems nevertheless persist following
this operation, contact a CITROËN dealer or a
qualified workshop.
Referring to the relevant section, reinitialise
certain equipment:
– Remote control key.
– Electric windows.
– Date and time.
– Preset radio stations.
Towing the vehicle
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or
for towing another vehicle using a removable
mechanical device.
► Raise lever A fully.
► Refit open clamp B on the (+) terminal.
155
In the event of a breakdown
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in the
country where you are driving.
Check that the towing vehicle is heavier
than the towed vehicle.
The driver must remain at the wheel of the
towed vehicle and must have a valid driving
licence.
When towing a vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, always use an approved
towbar; ropes and straps are prohibited.
The towing vehicle must move off gently.
When the vehicle is towed with its engine
off, there is no longer braking and steering
assistance.
– not possible to put the gearbox into
neutral, unlock the steering, or release the
parking brake;
– not possible to tow a vehicle with an
automatic gearbox, with the engine running;
– towing with only two wheels on the
ground;
– four-wheel drive vehicle;
– no approved towbar available.
Before towing the vehicle, it is
essential to put the vehicle in
free-wheeling mode.
For more information on Free-wheeling,
refer to the corresponding section.
A professional recovery service must
be called in the following cases:
– broken down on a motorway or main road;
Special feature of towing for hybrid
vehicles
With both rear wheels on the ground: it is
only authorized for short distances (about
9 miles (15 km)) and at reduced speed
(maximum 15 mph (25 km/h)).
With all four wheels on the ground:
the vehicle can be towed a maximum of
0.06 mile (100 metres) at a maximum speed
of 6 mph (10 km/h) (automatic gearbox in
mode N and N displayed in the instrument
panel).
Electric vehicles
An electric vehicle cannot under
any circumstances be used to tow another
vehicle.
However, it may be used, for example, to exit
a rut.
Towing constraints
Type of vehicle
(engine/gearbox)
Internal combustion/Manual
Internal combustion/Automatic
156
Front wheels on the
ground
Rear wheels on the
ground
Flatbed
4 wheels on the ground
with towbar
In the event of a breakdown
Towing constraints
Type of vehicle
(engine/gearbox)
Front wheels on the
ground
Rear wheels on the
ground
Flatbed
8
4 wheels on the ground
with towbar
Hybrid/Automatic
Electric 2WD
In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual
gearbox).
Accessing the tools
Failure to observe this instruction
could result in damage to certain
components (e.g. braking, transmission) and
to the absence of braking assistance the
next time the engine is started.
The towing eye is stored with the tool kit in the
boot.
For more information on accessing the Tool kit,
refer to the corresponding section.
Towing your vehicle
Automatic gearbox
Never tow the vehicle with the driving
wheels on the ground and the engine off.
To access the front screw thread:
► Unclip the cover by pressing on its left-hand
section.
To be towed:
► Screw the towing eye in fully.
► Install the towbar.
► Put the gearbox into neutral.
► Unlock the steering and release the parking
brake.
► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both
vehicles in accordance with the legislation in
force in the country in which you are driving.
► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
short distance.
157
In the event of a breakdown
Towing another vehicle
To access the rear screw thread:
► Unclip the cover by pressing at its right-hand
section.
► Pull the cover downwards.
To tow:
► Screw the towing eye in fully.
► Install the towbar.
► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both
vehicles.
► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
short distance.
158
Technical data
Engine technical data
and towed loads
Engines
The engine characteristics are given in the
vehicle's registration document, as well as in
sales brochures.
Only the values available at the time of
publication are presented in the tables.
Contact a CITROËN dealer or a qualified
workshop to obtain missing values.
The maximum power corresponds to
the value type-approved on a test bed,
under conditions defined by European
legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
Weights and towed loads
The weights and towed loads relating to
the vehicle are indicated on the registration
document, as well as in sales brochures.
These values are also indicated on the
manufacturer's plate or label.
For more information, contact a CITROËN
dealer or a qualified workshop.
The GTW (Gross Train Weight) and towed load
values indicated are valid up to a maximum
altitude of 1,000 metres. The towed load value
must be reduced by 10% for each additional
1,000 metres of altitude.
The maximum authorised nose weight
corresponds to the weight permitted on the
towball.
9
When exterior temperatures are high,
the vehicle performance may be
limited in order to protect the engine. When
the exterior temperature is higher than 37°C,
reduce the towed weight.
Towing even with a lightly loaded
vehicle can adversely affect its road
holding.
Braking distances are increased when towing
a trailer.
When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed
a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the
local legislation in force).
If the exterior temperature is high, it is
recommended that the engine is
allowed to idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the
vehicle comes to a stop, to facilitate its
cooling.
159
Technical data
Engines and towed loads - Petrol
Engines
PureTech 100
PureTech 80
PureTech 70
Gearboxes
BVM6
(Manual 6-speed)
BVM5
(Manual 5-speed)
BVM5
(Manual 5-speed)
EB2LTED MT6 Euro 6.4
EB2FAMK MT5 Euro 6.2
EB2FAMKd MT5 Euro 5
CHPV/4
HME
HMD
Cubic capacity (cc)
1,199
1,199
1,199
Max. power: EC standard (kW)
74
60
53
Unleaded
Unleaded
Unleaded
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
600
0
0
Unbraked trailer (kg)
600
0
0
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg)
61
-
-
Codes
Model codes:
SC...
Fuel
160
Technical data
Engines and towed loads - Hybrid
9
Hybrid 100 e-DCS6
Codes
Model codes:
SC...
EB2LTEDH2 EDCT6 Euro 6.4
CHPY/7
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
600
Unbraked trailer (kg)
600
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg)
61
Petrol engines
Gearboxes
PureTech 100
Electric dual-clutch automatic 6-speed
Cubic capacity (cc)
1,199
Max. power: EC standard (kW)
74
Fuel
Unleaded
Electric motor
Technology
Max. power: EC standard (kW)
Synchronous with permanent magnets
21
Traction battery
Technology
Lithium-Ion
Voltage (Volts DC)
48
Installed capacity (kWh)
0.9
161
Technical data
Engines and towed loads - Electric
Model codes:
SC...
-
BZYA/Z
Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg)
on a 10% or 12% gradient
-
550
Unbraked trailer (kg)
-
550
Maximum authorised nose weight (kg)
-
61
Synchronous with permanent magnets
Synchronous with permanent magnets
60/82
83/113
Lithium-Ion
Lithium-Ion
30
44
Electric motor
Technology
Max. power : EC standard (kW)/(hp)
Traction battery
Technology
Installed capacity (kWh)
Domestic charging
Alternating current (AC) voltage
Rating (A)
Accelerated charging
Alternating current (AC) voltage
Rating (A)
Superfast charging
Direct current (DC) voltage
162
Mode 2
Mode 2
230 (single-phase)
8 or 16
230 (single-phase)
8 or 16
Mode 3
Mode 3
230 (single-phase or three-phase)
16 or 32
230 (single-phase or three-phase)
16 or 32
Mode 4
Mode 4
400
400
Technical data
Dimensions (mm)
Identification markings
These dimensions have been measured on an
unladen vehicle.
Various visible markings for vehicle
identification and vehicle search.
* With folded mirrors.
** With unfolded mirrors.
9
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), under
the bonnet.
Stamped on the chassis.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), on the
dashboard.
Printed on an adhesive label visible through the
windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.
Affixed to the right-hand door.
Bears the following information:
– Manufacturer’s name.
– European whole vehicle type approval
number.
– Vehicle Identification number (VIN).
– Gross vehicle weight (GVW).
– Gross train weight (GTW).
– Maximum weight on the front axle.
– Maximum weight on the rear axle.
D. Tyres/paint code label.
Affixed to the driver's door.
163
Technical data
Bears the following information about the tyres:
– Tyre pressures, unladen and laden.
– Tyre specification, made up of the
dimensions and type as well as the load and
speed indices.
– Spare tyre inflation pressure.
Also indicates the paint colour code.
The vehicle may be originally equipped
with tyres with higher load and speed
indices than those indicated on the label,
without affecting tyre pressure (on cold
tyres).
In the event of a change in the type of tyres,
contact a CITROËN dealer for the tyre fits
approved for the vehicle.
164
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
Navigation on 10" Central
Touchscreen - 10" Central
Touchscreen
GPS navigation - Multimedia
audio system - Bluetooth®
telephone
The functions and settings described
vary according to the version and
configuration of the vehicle, and according
to the country of sale.
The system is protected in such a way
as to operate only on your vehicle.
For safety reasons and because they require
continued attention on the part of the driver,
the following operations must be carried out
with the vehicle stationary and the ignition
on:
– Pairing the smartphone with the system
via Bluetooth®.
– Using the smartphone.
– Connecting to Mirror Screen®
(Apple®CarPlay® or Android Auto).
– Changing the system settings and
configuration.
Some functions cannot be accessible when
driving.
The navigation system is a driving aid.
The driver stays fully responsible to
always observe the traffic and to drive
according to the applicable traffic rules.
All instructions on the proper use of the
navigation system should be followed.
By using and entering in the navigation
system, accept this page.
First steps
The system allows to interact with a variety of
features using the touch screen, the steeringmounted controls and voice commands.
By integrating with a Bluetooth® enabled
smartphone, the system provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, navigation
and smartphone's compatible applications.
The touch screen gives a quick access to all of
entertainment, communication and navigation
options.
1. Home page
3. Connected device status
For example, when a smartphone is
connected (battery charge level, network
signal strength, Bluetooth® connection).
10
4. Status bar
This bar displays icons and messages
relating to current system activities.
5. Time
6. Power on/off
Screen on/off
7. Volume control
Mute/Unmute sound
8. Widgets / Applications
Power on/off and Screen on/off
When button 6 is pressed, a page appears with
the date and time and the option to select
shutdown of the audio system or switch off the
touch screen.
Power Off
Press this button to activate this mode.
The touch screen will turn off and the sound
will cut out.
Screen Off
Press this button to activate this mode.
The touch screen will turn off and only the
sound from the current audio source remains
active.
In all cases, touch anywhere on the screen to
turn it on.
2. Main shortcuts
165
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
Steering-mounted
controls
Media (short press): change media
sources.
Increase volume.
Decrease volume.
Mute/Unmute the sound: short press in
the center.
Short press: validate a selection;
movement in the lists.
Radio: automatic search for the next station (in
the list of radio stations sorted by name or by
frequencies).
Media: next track.
Phone (short press): accept the incoming call.
Short press: validate a selection;
movement in the lists.
Radio: automatic search for the previous
station (in the list of radio stations sorted by
name or by frequencies).
Media: previous track.
Phone (short press): refuse the incoming call;
hang up the call in progress.
Voice control:
Short press, voice commands of the
smartphone connected using Bluetooth® or
166
Mirror Screen® (Siri with Apple®CarPlay®/Google
Assistant with Android Auto) via the system.
Voice commands
First steps
The voice recognition setting is available
with the cellular network and according
to the language previously selected in the
smartphone.
Information - Using the
system
When voice commands are activated,
say your command after the audible
signal.
For commands in several stages, interaction
takes place with the system to complete the
initial request.
Some commands self-validate after 7 seconds.
If the system has not taken your command into
account, it will indicate this by a voice message
and an on-screen display.
Voice Assistant/Data Usage
Vehicle's location and voice recordings
are not used by our supplier; only textual
transcriptions of your conversations with
the voice assistant are kept after to be
pseudonymised.
Opening voice recognition
Voice commands can be used on any
screen page, provided there are no other
sources which take priority in use (reverse,
emergency or assistance call, telephone call,
other smartphone voice recognition already
launched).
Choice of opening voice recognition:
► Press the button located on the steering
wheel.
or
► Say "Siri" or "OK Google" depending on
smartphone type.
To ensure that voice commands are
always recognised by the system,
please follow these recommendations:
– Use natural language in a normal tone
without breaking up words or raising your
voice.
– After opening voice recognition with the
steering wheel-mounted button, always wait
for the "beep” (audible signal) before talking.
– For optimal operation, it is recommended
that you close the windows and the sunroof
(depending on equipment) to avoid any
external interference, and switch the
ventilation off.
– Before speaking the voice commands, ask
the other passengers not to speak.
Voice command example for radio and
media:
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
"I want to listen to michael jackson"
Voice command example for telephone:
"Call Matthew's mobile"
"call 0113 345 9869"
"Call jonathan"
Media
If there is no telephone connected by
Bluetooth®, a pop-up window appears:
"No Device Connected", and the voice
session will be closed.
Voice command example for navigation:
"navigate home"
"Navigate me to gabrielle's house"
"search for public parking nearby"
Auto).
Select a media source (USB, iPod®,
Bluetooth®, Apple®CarPlay® and Android
Phone
10
Configure guidance and choose a
destination.
Use the services available in real time
depending on equipment.
Settings
Depending on the country, give
destination (address) instructions in
the language configured for the system.
Applications
Radio
Connect a smartphone via Bluetooth®,
make and receive calls, access the
phonebook, call log.
Navigation
(Depending on equipment)
Main settings for the touch screen, audio
system and GPS.
Radio
Changing the source (Media
to Radio)
Press Media to display the main page.
Select a radio station (FM, AM and DAB).
Press this button to swith to Radio main
page.
167
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
This icon is displayed.
Audio Settings
For more information on Settings, refer
to the corresponding section.
Changing the waveband
Press Radio to display the main page.
Press this button to change the
waveband (FM, AM or DAB), according to
the country of sale.
FM
18 radio stations can be preset on each
waveband.
Radio reception may be affected by
the use of electrical equipment not
approved by the Brand, such as a charger
with USB socket connected to the 12 V
socket.
The exterior environment (e.g. hills,
buildings, tunnels, basement car parks) may
block reception, including in RDS mode. This
phenomenon is normal in the propagation
of radio waves and does not indicate any
malfunction of the system.
Selecting a radio station
Press Radio to display the main page.
168
Press this button to start/stop the scan
for available radio stations.
The radio stations found are displayed in the list
of favourite radios.
Or
Press one of the buttons to
perform an automatic search for
the previous/next radio stations.
The tuner stops at the first radio station found.
Or
Press one of the buttons to
perform a manual search for the
lower/higher frequency.
On each press, the tuner decrements/
increments by one frequency step
(e.g. 0.05 MHz on FM; 1 KHz on AM). The value
of the frequency step depends on the country
of sale.
In the last two cases, it is possible to manually
store each radio station found.
If necessary, press one of the
buttons to navigate in the Radio
Favorites list.
1 2 3...
Press and hold down the desired
preset number.
A new memory entry replaces the
previous one.
Recalling a stored radio
station
Press Radio to display the main page.
Press this button to display the list of
available radio stations.
Select a radio station in the list.
Or
Press Radio to display the main page.
Press this button to change the
waveband (FM, AM or DAB), according to
the country of sale.
If necessary, press one of the
buttons to navigate in the Radio
Favorites list.
FM
1 2 3...
Press the desired preset number.
DAB (Digital Audio
Broadcasting) radio
Digital radio provides higher quality
reception and also the graphical
display of current information on the radio
station being listened to.
The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer
a choice of radio stations organised in
alphabetical order.
The volume may be higher when receiving
traffic alerts or news.
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
DAB/FM station tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the
territory.
When the digital radio signal is poor,
the "AF" (alternative frequency) option
enables to continue listening to the same
station by automatically switching to the
corresponding "FM" analogue station (if
there is one).
When the system switches to
analogue station, there is a delay of a
few seconds with sometimes a change in
volume.
When the digital signal quality is restored,
the system automatically changes back to
"DAB".
If the "DAB" radio station is not
available, the sound cuts out when the
digital signal quality becomes poor and the
"AF" alternative frequency is crossed out.
Media
Changing the source (Radio
to Media)
Press Radio to display the main page.
Press this button to swith to Media main
page.
This icon is displayed.
Audio Settings/Devices Settings
For more information on Settings, refer
to the corresponding section.
Changing the media source
Press Media to display the main page.
Press this button to change the media
source (USB, iPod®, Bluetooth®, Android
Auto or Apple®CarPlay®), according to the
country of sale.
Bluetooth® audio streaming
The streaming function allows you to listen
to the audio stream coming from the
smartphone(s) connected via USB, iPod®,
Bluetooth® or Mirror Screen®.
First adjust the volume on the portable device
(to a high level).
Then adjust the volume of the system.
If playback does not start, it may be necessary
to start the audio playback from the
smartphone.
Control is from the portable device or by using
the system's touch buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode,
the smartphone is considered to be a
media source.
Playing a track
Press Media to display the main page.
10
Once the portable device is connected,
browsing through the files is possible by
pressing this button.
Some information appears, such as the title,
artist, album and duration of the track currently
playing.
Short press: go to the previous/
next track.
Track playback/pause.
Repeat the current title or the list of
selected titles.
Random track playback.
To fast-forward or rewind a track, drag
the playback progress slider at the
bottom of the page.
Information and advice
The system supports USB Mass Storage devices
or Apple® devices via the USB sockets. The
adapter cable is not supplied.
Devices are managed using the audio system
controls.
The system will only play audio files with ".wma,
.aac, .flac, .ogg, .mp3" file extensions, at bit rates
between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps.
It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode.
169
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read.
".wma" files must be of the WMA 9 standard.
The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and
48 KHz.
To avoid reading and display problems, it is
recommended to choose file names less than
20 characters long that do not contain any
special characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format
(File Allocation Table).
It is recommended to use the original
USB cable of the mobile device.
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
Phone
Depending on the legislation in force
in the country, hand-held smartphones
are forbidden when driving.
To make a call directly from the smartphone,
the vehicle must first be safely stopped.
While driving, it is always possible to
use the steering wheel controls or
voice commands to start or end a call.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a
superimposed display in the screen.
To accept the incoming call:
170
Press this touch screen button.
or
Press this steering wheel button.
Once the call has been picked up, a screen
appears with the following information:
– the caller's phone number.
– the call status (incoming/outgoing, in
progress, conference, ended).
– the call duration.
To refuse the incoming call/ hang up the call in
progress:
Press this touch screen button.
or
Press this steering wheel button.
Making a call
Calling a new number
Press Phone to display the main page.
Press this button to display the numeric
keypad.
Compose the phone number on the numeric
keypad.
Press this button to launch the call.
Calling a contact from the phonebook
Press Phone to display the main page.
Press this button to display the
phonebook.
Select the desired contact name in the list or
Press this button to search the contact
name.
Enter your first letters; the corresponding
contact names appear.
Select the desired contact name in the list.
Press this button to launch the call.
Calling a number from the call log
Press Phone to display the main page.
Press this button to display the call log.
Select the desired last number in the list.
Press this button to launch the call.
Call options
Call in progress
During a phone conversation, a screen appears
with the following options:
Mute/Unmute
Press this button to mute/unmute
the micro of the system.
Handset/Hands-free
Press this button to transfer the
call from the system to the smartphone and
vice versa.
Hold/Retrieve
Press this button to hold/retrieve
the call.
End call
Press this button to hang up the call.
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
Add
Press this button to add a new call
(Conference call).
Keypad
Press this button to display the numeric
keypad.
Multiple calls
If there is a second incoming call, it is possible
to accept it.
The first call is on hold.
Then, it is possible to choose between
switching from one to the other or merging the
two calls.
The call can be ended with a specific contact or
the conference call can be terminated.
Swap
Press this button to switch to the first
call and put the second on hold.
Merge
Press this button to merge the two calls.
These options apply when a new call is received
during a call in progress.
Connectivity
Information - Bluetooth®
For safety reasons and because they
require continued attention on the
part of the driver, pairing operations
between the Bluetooth® mobile phone and
the vehicle's Bluetooth® hands-free system
must be carried out with the vehicle
stationary and the ignition switched on.
Make sure that the mobile phone's
Bluetooth® function is activated and
"visible to all".
In the event of a malfunction, it is advisable
to deactivate and then reactivate the
Bluetooth® function from the mobile phone.
Once back in the vehicle, if the last
connected mobile phone is present
again (Bluetooth® function activated), it is
automatically recognised and, within about
30 seconds of starting up, the pairing is
automatically carried out.
Pairing a Bluetooth® mobile
device
The services available depend on the
network, the SIM card and the
compatibility of the Bluetooth® mobile
devices used.
Consult the phone user guide, the service
provider and the OEM portal to check which
services are available.
To complete the pairing, whichever
procedure is used (from the phone or
from the system), ensure that the code is the
same in the system and in the phone.
If the pairing procedure fails, we recommend
deactivating and then reactivating the
Bluetooth® function on the phone and
deleting any CITROËN name present in the
devices list.
10
Depending on phone type, you may by
prompted to accept the transfer of
contacts.
Procedure from the phone
In order to make the system Bluetooth®
visible, first open the Devices Settings
menu on the system and activate the
Bluetooth® function.
From the Bluetooth® menu on your
phone, select the system name from the
list of detected devices.
In the system, accept the connection request
from the phone and follow the instructions on
the phone and system touch screen.
Procedure from the system
Press Phone to display the main page.
In order to make the system Bluetooth®
visible, first open the Devices Settings
menu on the system and activate the
Bluetooth® function.
Press Scan for Devices item.
The list of detected devices is displayed.
171
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
Select the required phone name in this list.
Managing paired mobile devices
To connect or disconnect a paired phone and
switch to Android Auto or Apple®CarPlay®:
Press Phone to display the main page.
Press Devices Settings to display the
paired devices list.
Press the Bluetooth icon to connect/
disconnect the desired paired device.
Deleting a paired mobile device
Press Phone to display the main page.
Press Devices Settings to display the
paired devices list.
Press this icon to delete the desired
paired device.
Information - Wi-Fi
The Wi-Fi connection including
credential sharing with the user’s
smartphone happens automatically after
successful Bluetooth® connection with a
wireless supported smartphone.
The Wi-Fi connection can only be used
for Android Auto or Apple®CarPlay®
wireless connection.
172
The Wi-Fi network uses the 5 GHz
frequency.
Some smartphones may not support this
feature.
Information - Mirror Screen®
Synchronising a smartphone enables
users to display applications that
support the smartphone’s Android Auto or
Apple®CarPlay® technology on the vehicle’s
screen.
For Apple®CarPlay® technology, the
Apple®CarPlay® function must first be
activated on the smartphone.
In all cases, the smartphone must be
unlocked, to enable the communication
process between the smartphone and the
system to function (at first connection only).
As principles and standards are constantly
changing, we recommend keeping the
smartphone's operating system up-to-date,
together with the date and time on the
smartphone and the system.
Refer to your smartphone for Android Auto
or Apple®CarPlay® settings.
For the list of suitable smartphones,
visit respectively the Android Auto or
Apple®CarPlay® website:
https://www.android.com/auto/
https://www.apple.com/in/ios/carplay/
Stop the vehicle before connecting
Android Auto or Apple®CarPlay® and
follow the instructions on your smartphone.
On connecting the USB cable, the
Android Auto or Apple®CarPlay®
function deactivates the system's Bluetooth®
mode.
It is recommended to use the original
USB cable of the mobile device.
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
Mirror Screen®
Apple®CarPlay® connection
The Apple®CarPlay® function requires
the use of a compatible smartphone
and compatible applications.
Connecting Apple®CarPlay® smartphone can
be carried out either by an USB cable or using a
wireless connection.
USB connection
Only one USB socket enables the
Mirror Screen® connection by
Apple®CarPlay®.
For more information on USB sockets, refer
to the corresponding section.
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
Connect the USB cable.
The smartphone charges when
connected by an USB cable.
Activate the Bluetooth® function on the
smartphone.
From the Home page, press this icon and
then activate the Bluetooth® function.
As soon as a Bluetooth® device offering
Apple®CarPlay® is connected, Apple®CarPlay® is
automatically available, provided a wide-band
communication channel (USB) is connected.
From the Home page, press the
AppleCarPlay icon to display the
Apple®CarPlay® interface.
When the USB cable is disconnected
and the ignition is switched off then
back on, the system will not automatically
switch to other mode; the source must be
changed manually.
Wireless connection
First activate the Bluetooth® and
Wi-Fi functions on the
smartphone.
From the Home page, press this icon and
then activate the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi
functions.
As soon as a Bluetooth® device offering
Apple®CarPlay® is connected, Apple®CarPlay® is
automatically available, provided a wide-band
communication channel (Wi-Fi) is connected.
As soon as the wireless connection is
established, press the AppleCarPlay
icon to display the Apple®CarPlay® interface.
There may be a pause before
applications become available,
depending on the network quality and the
smartphone performances.
For wireless Apple®CarPlay®, subsequent
automatic connection of the smartphone
requires activation of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi on
your device.
Android Auto connection
Ensure the latest Android Auto
application is available on your
smartphone. If not, install it via "Play Store".
The Android Auto function requires the use
of a compatible smartphone and compatible
applications.
Connecting Android Auto smartphone can be
carried out either by an USB cable or using a
wireless connection.
USB connection
Only one USB socket enables the
Mirror Screen® connection by Android
Auto.
For more information on USB sockets, refer
to the corresponding section.
Connect the USB cable.
The smartphone charges when
connected by an USB cable.
Activate the Bluetooth® function on the
smartphone.
From the Home page, press this icon and
then activate the Bluetooth® function.
As soon as a Bluetooth® device offering
Android Auto is connected, Android Auto is
automatically available, provided a wide-band
communication channel (USB) is connected.
From the Home page, press the Android
Auto icon to display the Android Auto
interface.
10
A validation procedure on the
smartphone has to be followed for the
first connection, with the vehicle stationary.
Wireless connection
First activate the Bluetooth® and
Wi-Fi functions on the
smartphone.
From the Home page, press this icon and
then activate the Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi
functions.
As soon as a Bluetooth® device offering
Android Auto is connected, Android Auto is
automatically available, provided a wide-band
communication channel (Wi-Fi) is connected.
As soon as the wireless connection is
established, press the Android Auto icon
to display the Android Auto interface.
173
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
There may be a pause before
applications become available,
depending on the network quality and the
smartphone performances.
For wireless Android Auto, subsequent
automatic connection of the smartphone
requires activation of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi on
your device.
As soon as the wireless connection is
re-established, press the Android Auto
icon to display the Android Auto interface.
Navigation
Navigation home page
(Depending on equipment)
Press Navigation to display the main
page.
Press this button to display the shortcut
menu for the various options.
Press this button to display the search
page (address, name or point of interest
(POI)).
Press the corresponding button
to zoom in/out, or use two fingers
on the screen.
Press this button to select the map
orientation mode (North or Vehicle).
Main menu
Press this button to display the search
page.
Press My Places to obtain private
destinations.
Select Home or Work and
confirm by pressing on it.
Access
Press Navigation to display the main
page.
Options Settings
Press this button to display the shortcut
menu for the various options.
Choosing a new destination
Press this button to display the search
page.
Click on the Search or Address field to enter an
address or a name.
An alphanumeric keypad appears.
Enter the "City", "Street", 'Number" and
confirm by pressing the respective proposals
displayed.
OK
Press this button to start the guidance.
Choosing one of the last destinations
Press this button to display the search
page.
Scroll down for the last desired destination and
confirm by pressing on it.
or
Press Recent Destinations to obtain
more destinations.
Select the desired destination and confirm by
pressing on it.
OK
174
Choosing one of My Places
Press this button to start the guidance.
OK
Press this button to start the guidance.
Choosing a point of interest (POI)
Press this button to display the search
page.
Select the type of POI by pressing on it
(e.g. Parking, Service station).
A list of the corresponding POI selected
appears.
or
Press Find Nearby POIs to obtain POI
around the vehicle position.
Select the POI to visit and confirm by pressing
on it.
OK
Press this button to start the guidance.
Main types of POI displayed on top of the
screen:
Parking
Service station
Bank/Finance
Restaurant
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
Hotel
Pharmacy/Medical
...
Additional types of POI
Choosing a point on the map
Press this button to display the search
page.
Explore the map by dragging it with fingers.
Zoom the desired area by pressing on "+"
button.
Select the destination by pressing the map.
OK
Press this button to start the guidance.
Settings
General Settings
Press Settings to display the main page.
Press General to access the various
items to be set:
– Language: to choose the system display
language from the list.
– Factory Reset: to return to factory default
system.
– Software Update: to update the system by
USB device and to see the current software/
hardware versions.
Display Settings
Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Display to access the various items
to be set:
– Night Brightness: to adjust the touch screen
brightness using the - and + buttons or by
moving the slider.
The brightness setting is only available
when the vehicle’s lamps are on in
night mode.
Devices Settings
Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Devices to access the various
items to be set:
– Bluetooth: to turn on/off the Bluetooth®
visibility of the system.
– Wi-Fi: to activate/deactivate the Wi-Fi
network of the system.
– Scan for devices: to select a mobile device to
be connected (USB, Bluetooth®, Apple®CarPlay®
or Android Auto).
– Device list: to view the previously paired
mobile device and connect or delete a device.
Audio Settings
Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Audio to access the various items
to be set:
– Radio Settings: to activate/deactivate
the radio functions (e.g. Radio Data System
(RDS), Alternative Frequency (AF), Traffic
Announcement (TA)).
– Balance/Fader: to adjust the left/right
(Balance) and front/rear (Fader) sound
distribution.
– Equalizer: to adjust the treble, mid and bass
sound levels and to activate/deactivate the
loudness and speed dependent volume control
functions.
– Volume: to adjust the volume according to
each sound source.
10
Clock Settings
Press Settings to display the main page.
Press Clock to access the various items
to be set:
– Format: to choose the date and time display
format.
– Date and Time: to manually adjust the date
and time.
Format
Select the Date Format: DD/MM/YYYY,
MM-DD-YY or YYYY-MM-DD.
Select the Time Format: 24‑hour or 12‑hour.
Press APPLY to validate.
175
Navigation on 10" Central Touchscreen - 10" Central Touchscreen
Date and Time
Adjust the Day, Month and Year using the Up
and Down arrows.
Adjust the Hours and Minutes using the Up and
Down arrows.
Press APPLY to validate.
176
Vehicle data recording and privacy
Vehicle data recording
and privacy
Electronic control units are installed in your
vehicle. These control units process data
received from the vehicle's sensors, for example,
or data they generate themselves or exchange
with each other. Some of these control units
are required for the correct operation of your
vehicle, some others assist you while driving
(driving or manoeuvring aids), while others
provide comfort or infotainment functions.
The following contains general information
about how data is processed within the vehicle.
You will find additional information about the
specific data which is downloaded, stored
and transmitted to third parties and what it
is used for in your vehicle under the keyword
"Data protection". This information is directly
associated with the references for the functions
in question contained in the corresponding
vehicle handbook. These are also available in
the general terms of sale of the vehicle, in the
general terms of sale of connected services, or
online on Brand website.
Personal reference
Each vehicle is identified by means of a unique
chassis number. Further options, such as the
vehicle's number plate, make it possible to trace
data on the keeper or driver of the vehicle.
The data generated or processed by control
units may therefore be personal, or be made
personal under certain conditions. Depending
on what vehicle data is available, conclusions
may be drawn on information such as your
driving behavior, your location or the route you
travel, or on your usage behavior.
Operating data in the
vehicle
The control units process the data used for the
operation of the vehicle.
This data includes, for example:
– Information about the state of the vehicle
(e.g. speed, travel time, lateral acceleration,
wheel rotation rate, fastened seat belts display).
– Environmental conditions (e.g. temperature,
rain sensor, distance sensor).
As a general rule, this data is temporary, is not
stored for longer than one operating cycle and
is only used within the vehicle itself. The control
units often record this data (including the
vehicle's key). This function allows either the
temporary or permanent storage of information
about the state of the vehicle, stresses on
components, servicing requirements, as well as
events and technical errors.
Technical data of the vehicle
Depending on the vehicle's equipment level,
the data stored is as follows:
– Operating state of system components
(e.g. filling level, tyre pressures, battery charge
status).
– Faults and malfunctions in important system
components (e.g. lamps, brakes).
– System reactions in specific driving situations
(e.g. deployment of an airbag, triggering of
stability control and braking systems).
– Information about events which have
damaged the vehicle.
– For electric and rechargeable hybrid vehicles,
the traction battery charge level and the
estimated driving range.
In particular circumstances (e.g. if the
vehicle has detected a malfunction), it may
be necessary to record data which would
otherwise simply not be stored.
When taking your vehicle in for servicing
(e.g. repairs, maintenance), the stored operating
data may be read along with the vehicle's
identification number and used if necessary.
The personnel working for the servicing
network (e.g. garages, manufacturers) or third
parties (e.g. roadside assistance agents) may
read the vehicle's data. This also applies to
work carried out under warranty and quality
assurance measures.
This data is generally read via the OBD
(On-Board Diagnostics) port fitted by law to
the vehicle. It is used to report on the technical
state of the vehicle or its components and
facilitates the diagnosis of malfunctions, in
compliance with warranty obligations and for
quality improvement. This data, in particular the
information relating to stress on components,
technical events, operator errors and other
11
177
Vehicle data recording and privacy
malfunctions, is sent to the Manufacturer, if
necessary, along with the vehicle's identification
number. The Manufacturer's liability may also
be engaged. The Manufacturer may also use
the operating data taken from the vehicle for
product recalls. This data may also be used to
check the customer's warranty and any claims
made under warranty.
Any malfunctions stored in the vehicle may be
reset by an after-sales service company during
servicing or repair work, or at your request.
Comfort and infotainment functions
Comfort settings and personalised settings
may be saved in the vehicle and modified or
reinitialised at any time.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment
level, this may include:
– Seat and steering wheel position settings.
– Chassis and air conditioning settings.
– Personalised settings such as the interior
lighting.
You can enter your own data into the functions
of your vehicle's audio and telematic system, as
part of the selected functionalities.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment
level, this may include:
– Multimedia data such as music, videos or
photos to be read by an integrated multimedia
system.
– Address book data to be used with an
integrated hands-free system or with an
integrated navigation system.
178
– Entered destinations.
– Data regarding the use of online services.
This data for the comfort and infotainment
functions may be stored locally in the vehicle
or saved to a device that you have connected
to the vehicle (e.g. smartphone, USB memory
stick or MP3 player). Data that you have entered
yourself may be deleted at any time.
This data may also be transmitted outside the
vehicle at your request, particularly when using
online services in line with the settings that you
have selected.
Smartphone integration (e.g. Android
Auto® or Apple®CarPlay®)
If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can
connect your smartphone or another mobile
device to the vehicle in order to operate it
using the vehicle's integrated controls. Images
and sounds from the smartphone can be
transmitted through the audio and telematics
system. Specific information is simultaneously
sent to your smartphone. Depending on
the type of integration, this includes data
such as location, day/night mode and other
general information about the vehicle. For
more information, please refer to the user
instructions for the vehicle or the audio and
telematics system.
Integrating a smartphone allows you to use
its applications, such as a navigation app or
music player. No other integration between
the smartphone and the vehicle is possible,
in particular active access to vehicle data.
How the data is processed subsequently is
determined by the supplier of the application
being used. The ability the change settings
depends on the application in question and
on the operating system installed on your
smartphone.
Online services - "Over-TheAir" connectivity
If your vehicle is connected to a wireless
network, data can be exchanged between
your vehicle and other systems. Connection
to a wireless network is made possible via
a transmitter located in your vehicle or
a mobile device that you have provided
(e.g. smartphone). The online services can be
used via this wireless connection. These include
online services and applications (apps) provided
to you by the Manufacturer or other suppliers.
Proprietary services
As regards the Manufacturer's online services,
the corresponding functions are described by
the Manufacturer in an appropriate medium
(e.g. handbook, Manufacturer's website) and
the information about data protection is
provided. Personal data may be used for online
services. The exchange of data for this purpose
takes place over a secure connection, using
for example the Manufacturer's dedicated
computer systems. The collection, processing
Vehicle data recording and privacy
and use of personal data for the development
of services are carried out solely on the basis of
a legal authorisation, for example in the case of
a legal emergency call system or a contractual
agreement or else under a consent agreement.
You can activate or deactivate the services
and functions (some may be chargeable) and,
in some cases, the vehicle's entire connection
to the wireless network. This does not include
legally required functions and services such as
an emergency communication system.
Third-party services
If you use online services provided by other
(third-party) suppliers, these services are subject
to the responsibility, the data protection and
the terms and conditions of use of the supplier
in question. The Manufacturer often has no
influence over the content exchanged in this
regard.
Please therefore ensure that you are aware of
the nature, extent and purpose of the collection
and use of personal data as part of the thirdparty services provided by the service provider
in question.
Applying legal Obligations
and respective requirements
This list can change according to European
regulations. Please consult online this
document to be sure to have the up-to-date list
of applying regulations in EU. Depending of the
date of the Type Approval of the vehicle, some
regulations cannot apply.
Generally, these legal obligations can disclose
data independtly of the in-vehicle privacy
settings.
eCall - Emergency Call
This function will be provided for the entire life
cycle of the VEHICLE.
This function, where operational, is provided
through the Public Emergency service of each
country where you are driving. It doesn't matter
where you bought your vehicle or where it is
registered.
In the event of a significant impact or a serious
accident recorded by the DEVICE on the
VEHICLE, with consequent shutdown of the
VEHICLE itself, a phone-call is automatically
forwarded from the VEHICLE to the respective
Public Emergency number (call to ‘112’ inside
Europe), together with the transmission of
the minimum data needed for identification
and location of the VEHICLE (i.e. your exact
location, the time of the accident, your vehicle's
identification number and direction of travel).
This information is only transmitted from your
vehicle in the event of a serious accident ;
it allows the Public Emergency Services to
assess and manage your situation. The Public
Emergency Services will act according to local
legislation and its own operating procedures.
Inside Europe, the 112-based eCall service is a
public service of general interest and should
therefore be accessible free of charge to all
consumers.
According to Regulation (EU) 2015/758, this
system is mandatory for all new types of vehicle
approved for manufacture after 31 March 2018.
The eCall system is only activated if your
vehicle is involved in a serious accident. The
rest of the time the system remains inactive.
This means that when you are simply driving
your vehicle, no permanent tracking (registering
your car's position or monitoring your driving)
or transmission of data takes place on behalf of
this regulatory service.
11
OBFCM - On-Board Fuel Consumption
Meter
This function will be provided for the entire life
cycle of the VEHICLE.
In accordance to Article 9 of Implementing
Regulation (EU) 2021/392 (“OBFCM”), this
regulatory service allows the European
Environment Agency (EEA) to collect vehicle
data related to usage (such as VIN, total
distance travelled, total fuel consumed, total
grid energy into battery when applicable).
These data are used by EEA to monitor in real
usage the fuel and energy consumption and
the CO2 emission of the new vehicles, in an
anonymized and aggregated way.
As mentioned in OBFCM regulation, the
CUSTOMER can refuse the collection and
transmission of vehicle’s data for regulatory
OBFCM purpose. This can be done by
179
Vehicle data recording and privacy
contacting Customer Care Center (contact
information available on the brand website
available for your country).
SLI - Speed Limit Information
This function will be provided for the entire
life cycle of the VEHICLE, only for vehicles sold
inside the Europe Market.
Pursuant to the Regulation (EU) 2018/858 on
the approval and market surveillance of motor
vehicles and their trailers, and of systems,
components and separate technical units
intended for such vehicles dated 30 May 2018,
as amended by the Regulation (EU) 2019/2144
dated 27 November 2019 and the Commission
Delegated Regulation (EU) 2021/1958 dated 23
June 2021 (together the "GSR V2 Regulations"),
car manufacturers are required to equip new
vehicles sold in Europe with various systems
aiming at guaranteeing the overall safety of
such vehicles.
As per Article 6 of the Regulation (EU)
2019/2144, such systems must include
an "intelligent speed assistance" system
(hereinafter "ISA") that provides the applicable
speed limit to the driver for at least 90% of
the total distance and for at least 80% of the
distance driven on each of the three road types
(urban roads and streets, non-urban roads, and
motorways/expressways/dual carriageways).
SLI function provides the driver with the
applicable speed limit on the road where driver
travels. SLI function aims to improve the safety
180
by allowing the vehicle to display in real time
applicable speed limit, even when external
conditions don't permit it (e.g. weather, sign
hidden by another vehicle). The applicable
speed limit is retrieved from the front camera
of the vehicle and maybe completed through
Over-The-Air communication system to improve
the reliability of information according to the
vehicle definition. To get valid speed limit
information, the vehicle's current position is
sent via the telematics unit and is immediately
deleted after processing. Tracking of the
vehicle position is not possible at any time. This
is not impacted by the privacy settings of the
vehicle.
As required by the “GSR V2 Regulations”, this
SLI feature is activated by default at key on,
but can be partially deactivated at every time
by the user of the vehicle, given that the driver
may cut the audible warning function from the
vehicle’s settings available from the central
touch screen. This will not impact the visual
warning function that will stay active and may
still require Over-The-Air data transmission of
current vehicle’s position for accurate speed
limit detection. Depending on the model of
your vehicle, it may be possible to also fully
cut the SLI function (i.e. to stop speed limit
detection and speed limit warning function)
from the central touch screen, and thus cut the
data transmission for the current trip.
Mileage disclosure to Car-Pass
association
(Only for vehicles registered in Belgium)
This disclosure is active in Belgium only, as an
answer to a Belgium law in order to prevent
vehicle mileage fraud (Belgium law of 28th
november 2018, applicable from 01/01/2020).
It is provided lifetime, as long as Car-Pass
association requests the data.
It consists in providing 4 times a year the
mileage of any vehicle registered in Belgium to
Car-Pass, an association delegated by belgian
authorities to collect and control this data.
This mileage is collected over-the-air by
Stellantis if another connected service already
uses it. This data is transmitted to Car-Pass
association, upon request of this organism.
For more information, please refer to the CarPass privacy policy (https://www.car-pass.be/en/
privacy-policy).
Data Use - Product Quality
Improvement
You acknowledge and agree that to improve
the quality of the products produced by
STELLANTIS AUTO SAS as a car maker, your
Vehicle Data (as defined in the Stellantis Privacy
Policy for connected services, see below) –
excluding the geolocation of the vehicle – are
transferred to the car maker for the purpose of
anomalies avoidance, aggregated data analysis
Vehicle data recording and privacy
for product improvement or creation of new
products.
Further information on this, and ways to
exercise your Privacy rights to this processing,
are described in the Stellantis Privacy Policy for
connected services (see below).
This document is available on brand websites, in
the section dedicated to connected services.
11
European Connected
Vehicles Privacy Policy of
Stellantis
This Privacy Policy for Connected Vehicles
(“Privacy Policy”) applies to the Personal Data
we process about users of the connected
services through our Vehicle, our Websites
or Application who have signed the General
Conditions as a Customer or who are
authorized by a Customer to access and use the
connected services.
This Privacy Policy is drafted pursuant Article
13 of the EU Regulation 679/2016 and will help
you understand better how we handle your
information.
In this document, you will find some
examples of how we process Personal Data,
and Definitions referring to more detailed
explanations (at the end this Privacy Policy) for
the capitalized terms herein. If you would like
any clarifications regarding this Privacy Policy or
how your data are processed, please send your
request to: dataprotectionofficer@stellantis.
com
181
Alphabetical index
A
ABS
63
Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox)
120
Accessories
59
Accessories, electrical
59
Active Safety Brake
102–103, 105
Active suspension
90
Adjusting headlamps
54
Adjusting head restraints
37
Adjusting seat
38
Adjusting the air flow
45
Adjusting the headlamp beam height
54
Adjusting the height and reach of
the steering wheel
40
Adjusting the temperature
44
Advice on care and maintenance
117–118, 137
Advice on driving
8, 77–78
Airbags
66–68, 70
Airbags, curtain
67–68
Airbags, front
67–68, 71
Airbags, lateral
67–68
Air conditioning
42–44
Air conditioning, automatic
44–45
Air conditioning, manual
43
Air vents
41
33
Alarm
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
63
Antitheft / Immobiliser
29
Applications
26
Assistance call
60–61
Assistance, emergency braking
63, 104
182
B
Battery, 12 V
130, 134, 149–155
Battery, 48 V
117, 154
Battery, ancillaries
149
Battery, charging
149, 151, 153–154
Battery, remote control
30
Bluetooth (telephone)
24
Bodywork
137
Bonnet
131–132
Boot
31, 50
Brake discs
135
Brake lamps
148
Brakes
135
Braking
89
Braking assistance system
63
Braking, automatic emergency
102–103, 105
Braking, dynamic emergency
82–83
Bulbs
146
Bulbs (changing)
146–148
Capacity, fuel tank
Cap, fuel filler
Care of the bodywork
Central locking
Changing a bulb
Changing a fuse
Changing a wheel
Changing a wiper blade
C
115–116
115–116
137
29, 32
146–148
149
139, 143
57
Changing the remote control battery
30
Changing to free-wheeling
136, 156
Charge level indicator (Electric)
20
Charger, induction
48
Charger, wireless
48
Charging cable
121
Charging cable (Electric)
120
Charging connector (Electric)
119, 125, 127–128
Charging flap (Electric)
119, 125, 127–128
Charging system (Electric)
6, 118, 132
Charging the battery
154
Charging the traction battery
(Electric)
118, 125, 127–128
Charging the traction battery
(Rechargeable hybrid)
19
Checking the engine oil level
18
Checking the levels
132–134
Checking tyre pressures
(using the kit)
140, 142
Checks
132, 134–136
Checks, routine
134–135
Child lock
76
Children
66, 71–72
Children (safety)
76
66, 69–70, 72
Child seats
Child seats, conventional
72–73, 75
Child seats, i-Size
72–73, 75
Child seats, ISOFIX
71–73, 75
Cleaning (advice)
117–118, 137–138
Closing the boot
31
Closing the doors
29, 31
Coat hanger
49
Alphabetical index
Collision Risk Alert
Configuration, vehicle
Control, emergency boot release
Control, emergency door
Control, heated seats
Control stalk, lighting
Control stalk, wipers
Control unit
Courtesy lamp
Courtesy lamps
Cruise control
102–104
20
32
29–30
38
51
55–57
120–121
148
46–47
100–102
Daytime running lamps
Deactivating the passenger airbag
Deadlocking
Deferred charging
Deferred charging (Electric)
Defrosting
Defrosting, front
Defrosting, rear screen
Demisting
Demisting, front
Demisting, rear
Dials and gauges
Dimensions
Dipstick
Direction indicators (turn signals)
Display screen, instrument panel
Distance recorder
52, 147
67, 70–71
28
126
26, 119, 125
41, 45
45
45
41, 45
45
45
10
163
18, 133
52, 147–148
10
19
D
Domestic charging
121
Domestic charging (Electric)
126–128, 162
Doors
31
Drive, electric
6, 118, 132, 149, 156, 162
Driver’s attention warning
106
Drive selector (Electric)
89
Driving
77–78
Driving aids camera (warnings)
96
Driving aids (recommendations)
95
Driving economically
8
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
63
E
e-Auto mode
42, 93, 115, 131
EBFD
63
Eco-driving (advice)
8
ECO mode
90
Electric windows
34
Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
63
Emergency braking assistance (EBA)
63
Emergency call
60–61, 179
Emergency warning lamps
59, 139
Energy economy (mode)
130
Energy economy mode
130
Energy recovery
19, 89
Engine
136
Engine, 48 V hybrid
93, 117, 156, 161
Engine compartment
132
Engine, petrol
132, 160
Engines
159–161
Environment
ESC (electronic stability control)
Event data recorder
Exterior lighting
8, 30, 78
63
62
54
Fatigue detection
Filling the fuel tank
Filter, air
Filter, oil
Filter, passenger compartment
Fitting a wheel
Fitting roof bars
Fittings, boot
Fittings, interior
Flap, charging
Flap, fuel filler
Flashing indicators
Fluid, brake
Fluid, engine coolant
Foglamp, rear
Foglamps, front
Foglamps, rear
Folding the rear seats
Fuel
Fuel consumption
Fuel level, low
Fuel (tank)
Fuses
106
115–116
135
135
42, 134
143–144
129–130
49
47
126
115–116
52, 147
133
133
51
51, 147
51
39
8, 115
8, 19
115–116
115
149
F
183
Alphabetical index
G
Gauge, fuel
115–116
Gearbox, automatic
83, 86, 88, 135, 149
Gearbox, dual-clutch automatic
86
Gearbox, manual
83, 135
Gear lever
91
Gear lever, manual gearbox
83
Gear shift indicator
90
Glove box
47
H
Hazard warning lamps
59, 139
Headlamps (adjustment)
54
Headlamps, automatic dipping
54–55
Headlamps, automatic operation
52–53
Headlamps, dipped beam
147
Headlamps, halogen
146
Headlamps, main beam
54, 147
Head restraints, front
37
Head restraints, rear
38–39
Heated steering wheel
40
Heating
41, 43
Heating, programmable
26, 46
High voltage
118
Hill start assist
91
Histogramme, fuel consumption
26
Hooks
50
Horn
60
Hybrid, 48 V mild
5, 93, 117, 156, 161
184
Hybrid system
5, 117
I
Immobiliser, electronic
Indicator, coolant temperature
Indicator, engine oil level
Indicators, direction
Indicator, service
Inflating tyres
Inflating tyres and accessories
(using the kit)
Information, vehicle
Infrared camera
Instrument panel
Instrument panel, LCD
Instrument panel, matrix
Instrument panels
ISOFIX mountings
79
17
18
52, 147
18
135, 164
140, 142
177
96
10, 96
10, 20
10, 21
20
71, 73, 75
Jack
Jump starting
140, 143
150, 152
Key
Key, electronic
28–30
28–29
J
K
Key with remote control
Kit, puncture repair
Kit, temporary puncture repair
Klaxon
28, 79
140
139–142
60
Labels, identification
Lamps, rear
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Lane keeping assist
Leather (care)
LEDs - Light-emitting diodes
Level, brake fluid
Level, engine coolant
Level, engine oil
Levels and checks
Level, screenwash fluid
Light-emitting diodes - LEDs
Lighting, boot
Lighting dimmer
Lighting, exterior
Lighting, guide-me home
Lighting, interior
Lighting, welcome
Loading
Load reduction mode
Locking
Locking from the inside
Locking the doors
Lounge mode
163
148
107–108
108
138
52, 146, 148
133
17, 133
18, 133
132–134
56, 134
52, 146, 148
50, 148
23
51, 54
53
46–47
53
129–130
131
28–29
32
32
125
L
Alphabetical index
M
Mains socket (domestic network)
120
Maintenance (advice)
117–118, 137
Maintenance, routine
96, 134, 136
Manoeuvring aids (recommendations)
95
Map reading lamps
46
Markings, identification
163
Mat
49, 96
Menu
20
Minimum traction battery charge
level (Electric)
20
Mirror, rear view
41
Mirrors, door
40, 45
Mobile application
26, 46, 125–126
Mode, driving
90
Motor, electric
80, 117, 132, 162
Mountings, ISOFIX
71, 73, 75
Navigation
Obstacle detection
Oil change
Oil consumption
Oil, engine
On-board tools
N
24
O
111
133
133
133
139–140
Opening the bonnet
Opening the boot
Opening the doors
Over-speed (buzzer)
131
28, 31
28, 31
99
P
Pads, brake
135
Paint
137, 163
Paint colour code
163
Parcel shelf, rear
50
Parking brake
81, 135
Parking brake, electric
81–83, 135
Parking (sensors)
111
Parking sensors, audible and visual
111
Parking sensors, rear
111
Passenger compartment temperature preconditioning (Electric)
26, 46
Pedestrian horn (Electric)
60, 78
Plates, identification
163
Port, USB
47
Power
19
Power indicator (Rechargeable hybrid)
19
Pressures, tyres
135, 141, 164
Pre-tensioning (seat belts)
66
Protecting children
67, 69–72
Public fast charging station
120, 126
Puncture
140–141, 143
R
Radio Media
24
Range
9
Reading lamps
46–47
Rear bench seat
38
Rear screen (demisting)
45
Recharging the battery
149, 151, 153
Recharging the traction battery
121
Recharging the traction battery (Electric)
118,
125, 127–128
Recorder, trip distance
19
Reduction of electrical load (mode)
131
Regenerative braking (deceleration
by engine braking)
89
Reinitialising the remote control
31
Reinitialising the under-inflation detection
system
95
Reminder, key in ignition
80
Reminder, lighting on
52
Remote control
28–29
Remote functions
126
Remotely operable functions (Electric)
26, 46
Removing a wheel
143–144
Removing the mat
49
Replacing bulbs
146–148
149
Replacing fuses
Replacing the air filter
135
Replacing the oil filter
135
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter
134
Reservoir, screenwash
134
185
Alphabetical index
Resetting the trip recorder
Reversing camera
Reversing lamps
Road sign recognition
Roof bars
19
96, 112
148
96, 180
129–130
S
Safety, children
67, 69–72
Screenwash
56
Screenwash, front
56
Screenwash, rear
56
Seat belts
64–66
Seat belts, rear
65
Seats, front
37
Seats, heated
38
Seats, rear
38–39, 69
Selector, gear
83, 86, 88, 91
Sensors (warnings)
96
Serial number, vehicle
163
Servicing
18, 134, 136
Settings, equipment
20, 26
Sidelamps
52, 147–148
Side repeater (turn signal)
148
Silent vehicle warning sound (Electric)
60, 78
Smartphone
24, 27, 48
Snow chains
94, 128–129
Socket, 12 V accessory
47
Socket, diagnostic
59
Speed limiter
99–100
Speed limit recognition
96, 180
186
Speedometer
96
Stability control (ESC)
63
Starting the engine
80
Starting the vehicle
79–80
Starting using another battery
150, 152
Stay, engine bonnet
131–132
Steering wheel (adjustment)
40
Stickers, customising
137
Stopping the vehicle
79–80, 88
Stop & Start
23, 42, 45, 91–93, 115, 131, 134, 152
Storage
47
Sunshine sensor
42
Sun visor
47
Super-fast charging (Electric)
126–128, 162
Suspension with progressive hydraulic
stops
90
Switch, ignition
79–80
Switching off the engine
80
Synchronising the remote control
31
System, event data recording
62
Tables of engines
Tank, fuel
Technical data
Telephone
Telephone, hands-free
Temperature, coolant
Tools
Top Tether (fixing)
T
161–162
115–116
160–162
24
24
17
139–140
71, 73, 75
Total distance recorder
Touch screen
Towbar
Towed loads
Towing
Towing another vehicle
Towing the vehicle
Traction battery
Traction battery charge
Traction battery (Electric)
Traction control (ASR)
Trailer
Trajectory control systems
Triangle, warning
Trip computer
Trip recorder zero reset
Tyres
Tyre under-inflation detection
19
25, 46
129
159–161
155–157
158
155–157
117
121
20, 119, 125, 162
63
129
63
139
22–23
19
135, 164
94, 141
Under-inflation (detection)
Unlocking
Unlocking from the inside
Unlocking the doors
Vehicle data recording and privacy
Ventilation
U
94
28
32
32
V
177
41–43
Alphabetical index
Visibility
45
W
Wallbox (Electric)
120
Warning and indicator lamps
11
Warning lamp, driver's seat belt
not fastened
65
Warning lamps
11
Warning lamp, seat belts
65
Warnings and indicators
11
Washing
96
Washing (advice)
117–118, 137
Weights
159–161
Wheel, spare
135, 139–140, 143, 145
Windscreen, heated
45–46
Wiper blades (changing)
57
Wiper, rear
56
Wipers
55, 57
Wipers, automatic rain sensitive
56–57
Wipers, windscreen
56
187
Appendix
188
Appendix
189
4DCONCEPT
Recycled materials/End-of-Life Vehicles
Automobiles CITROËN declares, in accordance with the
provisions of European legislation (Directive 2000/53) and The
End-of-Life Vehicles (Producer Responsibility) (Amendment)
Regulation 2010 No.1094, that it achieves the objectives set by
these legislations and that recycled materials are used in the
manufacture of the products that it sells.
Reproducing and translating this document, even partially,
is strictly prohibited without written authorisation from
Automobiles CITROËN.
Automobiles CITROËN,
société par actions simplifiée au capital social de 159.000.000 euros dont le siège
social est situé 2-10 boulevard de l'Europe, 78300 POISSY, et immatriculée auprès
du RCS de Versailles sous le numéro 642 050 199.
www.citroen.com
Printed in the EU
04-24
CC3EUDO2401EN-1
*CC3EUDO2401EN-1*
">